Rohde and Schwarz and Co KG 61020307 M3SR Series 4400 VHF/Transmitter User Manual
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co KG M3SR Series 4400 VHF/Transmitter
Contents
- 1. Warning
- 2. Product Literature
- 3. Revised Manual
Revised Manual
| Download: |  |
| Mirror Download [FCC.gov] | |
| Document ID | 1012212 |
| Application ID | 6NCA4XzgnssQGHjHf4NWbw== |
| Document Description | Revised Manual |
| Short Term Confidential | No |
| Permanent Confidential | No |
| Supercede | No |
| Document Type | User Manual |
| Display Format | Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf |
| Filesize | 250.06kB (3125750 bits) |
| Date Submitted | 2008-10-07 00:00:00 |
| Date Available | 2003-06-09 00:00:00 |
| Creation Date | 2008-10-06 14:28:45 |
| Producing Software | Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows) |
| Document Lastmod | 2008-10-06 14:28:45 |
| Document Title | Untitled Document |
| Document Creator | Windows NT 4.0 |
Radio Communication Systems
Division
2SHUDWRUÂśV 0DQXDO
XT 4410A
XU 4410A
XD 4410A
XD 4460A
XU 4410A
XT 4460A
065
9+)8+)DQG9+)8+)75$16&(,9(56
(valid for models ⼠02)
M3SR Software Release:
8.00
6076.0822.12.02 â 1
Š
Copying of this document as well as any other utilization and communication of its content are only admissible
with the permission of the originator or other authorized persons.
Any disregard will be prosecuted and is subject to restitution (UrhG, UWG, BGB). For the case a patent is issued or the design is officially registered all rights are reserved.
52+'( 6&+:$5=*PE+ &R.*Â'0ÂQFKHQÂ0ÂKOGRUIVWUÂ7HO ,QW
7HOHID[ ,QW
3ULQWHGLQWKH)HGHUDO5HSXEOLFRI*HUPDQ\Â6XEMHFWWRFKDQJHÂ'DWDZLWKRXWWROHUDQFHV RUGHURIPDJQLWXGHRQO\
6076.0822.12.02 â 2
Adressen/Addresses
FIRMENSITZ/HEADQUARTERS
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
MĂźhldorfstraĂe 15 ¡ D-81671 MĂźnchen
Postfach 80 14 69 ¡ D-81614 Mßnchen
Phone
Fax
E-mail
+49 (89) 41 29-0
+49 89 4129-121 64
WERKE/PLANTS
Rohde & Schwarz Messgerätebau GmbH
RiedbachstraĂe 58 ¡ D-87700 Memmingen
Postfach 1652 ¡ D-87686 Memmingen
+49 (8331) 108-0
+49 (8331) 108-11 24
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Werk Teisnach
Kaikenrieder StraĂe 27 ¡ D-94244 Teisnach
Postfach 1149 ¡ D-94240 Teisnach
+49 (9923) 857-0
+49 (9923) 857-11 74
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
+49 (2203) 49-0
Dienstleistungszentrum KĂśln
+49 (2203) 49 51-308
Graf-Zeppelin-StraĂe 18 ¡ D-51147 KĂśln
info@rsdc.rohde-schwarz.com
Postfach 98 02 60 ¡ D-51130 KÜln
service@rsdc.rohde-schwarz.com
Zweigniederlassung Sßd, Geschäftsstelle
MĂźnchen
MĂźhldorfstraĂe 15 ¡ D-81671 MĂźnchen
Postfach 80 14 69 ¡ D-81614 Mßnchen
+49 (89) 41 86 95-0
+49 (89) 40 47 64
Zweigniederlassung Sßd, Geschäftsstelle
NĂźrnberg
DonaustraĂe 36
D-90451 NĂźrnberg
+49 (911) 642 03-0
+49 (911) 642 03-33
Zweigniederlassung Mitte, Geschäftsstelle
Neu-Isenburg
SiemensstraĂe 20
D-63263 Neu-Isenburg
+49 (6102) 20 07-0
+49 (6102) 20 07 12
ADRESSEN WELTWEIT/ADDRESSES
WORLDWIDE
Albania
siehe / see Austria
Algeria
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Bureau d'Alger
5B Place de Laperrine
16035 Hydra-Alger
Argentina
PRECISION ELECTRONICA S.R.L.
Av. Pde Julio A. Roca 710 - 6° Piso
(C1067ABP) Buenos Aires
Australia
ROHDE & SCHWARZ (AUSTRALIA) Pty. Ltd.
Sales Support
Unit 6
2-8 South Street
Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116
Austria
ROHDE & SCHWARZ-ĂSTERREICH
Ges.m.b.H.
+213 (21) 48 20 18
+213 (21) 69 46 08
TOCHTERUNTERNEHMEN/SUBSIDIARIES
Rohde & Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH
MĂźhldorfstraĂe 15 ¡ D-81671 MĂźnchen
Postfach 80 14 69 ¡ D-81614 Mßnchen
+49 (89) 41 29-137 74
+49 (89) 41 29-137 77
Rohde & Schwarz International GmbH
MĂźhldorfstraĂe 15 ¡ D-81671 MĂźnchen
Postfach 80 14 60 ¡ D-81614 Mßnchen
+49 (89) 41 29-129 84
+49 (89) 41 29-120 50
Rohde & Schwarz Engineering and Sales
GmbH
MĂźhldorfstraĂe 15 ¡ D-81671 MĂźnchen
Postfach 80 14 29 ¡ D-81614 Mßnchen
+49 (89) 41 29-137 11
+49 (89) 41 29-137 23
R&S BICK Mobilfunk GmbH
Fritz-Hahne-Str. 7 ¡ D-31848 Bad Mßnder
Postfach 2062 ¡ D-31844 Bad Mßnder
+49 (5042) 998-0
+49 (5042) 998-105
Rohde & Schwarz FTK GmbH
WendenschlossstraĂe 168, Haus 28
D-12557 Berlin
+49 (30) 658 91-122
+49 (30) 655 50-221
Rohde & Schwarz SIT GmbH
AgastraĂe 3
D-12489 Berlin
+49 (30) 658 84-0
+49 (30) 658 84-183
ADRESSEN DEUTSCHLAND/ADDRESSES
GERMANY
Rohde & Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH
MĂźhldorfstraĂe 15 ¡ D-81671 MĂźnchen
Postfach 80 14 69 ¡ D-81614 Mßnchen
ROHDE & SCHWARZ Azerbaijan
Liaison Office Baku
ISR Plaza
340 Nizami Str.
370000 Baku
Baltic
Countries
siehe / see Denmark
Bangladesh
BIL Consortium Ltd.
Corporation Office
House No: 95/A, Block - 'F'
Road No. 4, Banani
Dhaka-1213
Belgium
ROHDE & SCHWARZ BELGIUM N.V.
Excelsiorlaan 31 Bus 1
1930 Zaventem
Brasil
ROHDE & SCHWARZ DO BRASIL LTDA.
+55 (11) 56 44 86 11 (general)
Av. Alfredo Egidio de Souza Aranha n° 177, +55 (11) 56 44 86 25 (sales)
1° andar - Santo Amaro
+55 (11) 56 44 86 36
04726-170 Sao Paulo - SP
sales-brazil@rsdb.rohdeschwarz.com
Brunei
GKL Equipment PTE. Ltd.
Jurong Point Post Office
P.O.Box 141
Singapore 916405
Bulgaria
ROHDE & SCHWARZ ĂSTERREICH
Representation Office Bulgaria
39, Fridtjof Nansen Blvd.
1000 Sofia
BosniaHerzegovina
siehe / see Slovenia
+49 (30) 34 79 48-0
+49 (30) 34 79 48 48
+49 (228) 918 90-0
+49 (228) 25 50 87
Zweigniederlassung Nord, Geschäftsstelle
Hamburg
Steilshooper Alle 47 ¡ D-22309 Hamburg
Postfach 60 22 40 ¡ D-22232 Hamburg
+49 (40) 63 29 00-0
+49 (40) 630 78 70
Zweigniederlassung Mitte, Geschäftsstelle
KĂśln
Niederkasseler StraĂe 33 ¡ D-51147 KĂśln
Postfach 900 149 ¡ D-51111 KÜln
+49 (2203) 807-0
+49 (2203) 807-650
+43 (1) 602 61 41-0
+43 (1) 602 61 41-14
office@rsoe.rohde-schwarz.com
Azerbaijan
+49 89 4129-133 74
+4989 4129-133 77
Zweigniederlassung BĂźro Bonn
Josef-Wirmer-StraĂe 1-3 ¡ D-53123 Bonn
Postfach 140264 ¡ D-53057 Bonn
+61 (2) 88 45 41 00
+61 (2) 96 38 39 88
lyndell.james@rsaus.rohdeschwarz.com
Am Euro Platz 3
Gebäude B
1120 Wien
Zweigniederlassungen der Rohde &
Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH/Branch offices of
Rohde & Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH
Zweigniederlassung Nord, Geschäftsstelle
Berlin
Ernst-Reuter-Platz 10 ¡ D-10587 Berlin
Postfach 100620 ¡ D-10566 Berlin
+541 (14) 331 41 99
+541 (14) 334 51 11
alberto_lombardi@prec-elec.com.ar
+994 (12) 93 31 38
+994 (12) 93 03 14
RS-Azerbaijan@RUS.RohdeSchwarz.com
+880 (2) 881 06 53
+880 (2) 882 82 91
+32 (2) 721 50 02
+32 (2) 725 09 36
info@rsb.rohde-schwarz.com
+65 (6) 276 06 26
+65 (6) 276 06 29
gkleqpt@singnet.com.sg
+359 (2) 963 43 34
+359 (2) 963 21 97
rohdebg@rsoe.rohde-schwarz.com
Adressen/Addresses
Canada
ROHDE & SCHWARZ CANADA Inc.
555 March Rd.
Kanata, Ontario K2K 2M5
Canada
TEKTRONIX CANADA Inc.
Test and Measurement
4929 Place Olivia
Saint-Laurent, Pq
+1 (613) 592 80 00
+1 (613) 592 80 09
cgirwarnauth@rscanada.ca
+1 (514) 331 43 34
+1 (514) 331 59 91
Denmark
ROHDE & SCHWARZ DANMARK A/S
Ejby Industrivej 40
2600 Glostrup
Ecuador
REPRESENTACIONES MANFRED
WEINZIERL
VĂa LĂĄctea No. 4 y Via Sta. InĂŠs
P.O.Box 17-22-20309
1722 CumbayĂĄ-Quito
Egypt
U.A.S. Universal Advanced Systems
31 Manshiet El-Bakry Street
Heliopolis
11341 Cairo
El Salvador
siehe / see Mexico
Estonia
ROHDE & SCHWARZ DANMARK A/S
Estonian Branch Office
Narva mnt. 13
10151 Tallinn
Finland
Orbis Oy
P.O.Box 15
00421 Helsinski 42
France
ROHDE & SCHWARZ FRANCE
Immeuble "Le Newton"
9-11, rue Jeanne Braconnier
92366 Meudon La ForĂŞt CĂŠdex
France
Niederlassung/Subsidiary Rennes
37 Rue du Bignon
Bât. A
F-35510 Cesson Sevigne
+33 (0) 299 51 97 00
+33 (0) 299 51 98 77
France
Niederlassung/Subsidiary Toulouse
Technoparc 3
B.P. 501
F-31674 Labège CÊdex
+33 (0) 561 39 10 69
+33 (0) 561 39 99 10
France
Aix-en-Provence
+33 (0) 494 07 39 94
+33 (0) 494 07 55 11
France
Office Lyon
+33 (0) 478 29 88 10
+33 (0) 478 79 18 57
France
Office Nancy
+33 (0) 383 54 51 29
+33 (0) 383 54 82 09
Ghana
KOP Engineering Ltd.
P.O. Box 11012
3rd Floor Akai House, Osu
Accra North
+233 (21) 77 89 13
+233 (21) 701 06 20
Greece
MERCURY S.A.
6, Loukianou Str.
10675 Athens
+302 (10) 722 92 13
+302 (10) 721 51 98
mercury@hol.gr
Guatemala
siehe / see Mexico
Honduras
siehe / see Mexico
Hongkong
Electronic Scientific Engineering
36/F Dorset House, Taikoo Place
979 King's Road
Quarry Bay
Hong Kong
Hungary
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Budapesti Iroda
VĂĄci Ăşt 169
1138 Budapest
Iceland
siehe / see Denmark
+45 (43) 43 66 99
+45 (43) 43 77 44
+593 (22) 89 65 97
+593 (22) 89 65 97
mweinzierl@accessinter.net
Montreal H4R 2V6
Chile
DYMEQ Ltda.
Av. Larrain 6666
Santiago
China
ROHDE & SCHWARZ China Ltd.
Representative Office Shanghai
Central Plaza
227 Huangpi North Road
RM 807/809
Shanghai 200003
+86 (21) 63 75 00 18
+86 (21) 63 75 91 70
ROHDE & SCHWARZ China Ltd.
Representative Office Beijing
Room 602, Parkview Center
2 Jiangtai Road
Chao Yang District
Beijing 100016
+86 (10) 64 31 28 28
+86 (10) 64 37 98 88
info.rschina@rsbp.rohdeschwarz.com
China
+56 (2) 339 20 00
+56 (2) 339 20 10
dnussbaum@dymeq.com
China
ROHDE & SCHWARZ China Ltd.
Representative Office Guangzhou
Room 2903, Metro Plaza
183 Tianhe North Road
Guangzhou 510075
China
ROHDE & SCHWARZ China Ltd.
Representative Office Chengdu
Unit G, 28/F, First City Plaza
308 Shuncheng Avenue
Chengdu 610017
+86 (28) 86 52 76 05 to 09
+86 (28) 86 52 76 10
rsbpc@mail.sc.cninfo.net
ROHDE & SCHWARZ China Ltd.
Unit 3115
31/F Entertainment Building
30 Queen's Road Central
Hongkong
+85 (2) 21 68 06 70
+85 (2) 21 68 08 99
China
China
China
China
ROHDE & SCHWARZ China Ltd.
Representative Office Xi'an
Room 10125, Jianguo Hotel Xi'an
No. 2, Huzhu Road
Xi'an 710048
+86 (20) 87 55 47 58
+86 (20) 87 55 47 59
+86 (29) 321 82 33
+86 (29) 329 60 15
sherry.yu@rsbp.rohde-schwarz.com
Shanghai ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Communication Technology Co.Ltd.
Central Plaza, Unit 809
227 Huangpi North Road
Shanghai 200003
Beijing ROHDE & SCHWARZ Communication
Technology Co.Ltd.
Room 106, Parkview Centre
No. 2, Jiangtai Road
Chao Yang District
Beijing 100016
Croatia
siehe / see Slovenia
Cyprus
HINIS TELECAST LTD.
Agiou Thoma 18
Kiti
+86 (10) 64 38 80 80
+86 (10) 64 38 97 06
+357 (24) 42 51 78
+357 (24) 42 46 21
hinis@logos.cy.net
+20 (2) 455 67 44
+20 (2) 256 17 40
an_uas@link.net
+372 (6) 14 31 23
+372 (6) 14 31 21
margo.fingling@rsdk.rohdeschwarz.com
+358 (9) 47 88 30
+358 (9) 53 16 04
info@orbis.fi
+33 (1) 41 36 10 00
+33 (1) 41 36 11 73
+852 (25) 07 03 33
+852 (25) 07 09 25
stephenchau@ese.com.hk
Larnaca 7550
Czech Republic ROHDE & SCHWARZ - Praha s.r.o.
Hadovka Office Park
EvropskĂĄ 33c
16000 Praha 6
+420 (2) 24 31 12 32
+420 (2) 24 31 70 43
office@rscz.rohde-schwarz.com
+36 (1) 412 44 60
+36 (1) 412 44 61
rohdehu@rsoe.rohde-schwarz.com
Adressen/Addresses
India
ROHDE & SCHWARZ India Pvt. Ltd.
Bangalore Office
No. 24, Service Road, Domlur
2nd Stage Extension
Bangalore - 560 071
+91 (80) 535 23 62
+91 (80) 535 03 61
rsindiab@rsnl.net
India
ROHDE & SCHWARZ India Pvt. Ltd.
Hyderabad Office
302 & 303, Millenium Centre
6-3-1099/1100, Somajiguda
+91 (40) 23 32 24 16
+91 (40) 23 32 27 32
rsindiah@nd2.dot.net.in
India
ROHDE & SCHWARZ India Pvt. Ltd.
+91 (11) 26 32 63 81
244, Okhla Industrial Estate, Phase-III
+91 (11) 26 32 63 73
New Delhi 110020
sales@rsindia.rohde-schwarz
services@rsindia.rohde-schwarz.com
India
ROHDE & SCHWARZ India Pvt. Ltd.
RS India Mumbai Office
B-603, Remi Bizcourt, Shah Industrial
Estate, Off Veera Desai Road
Mumbai - 400 058
PT ROHDE & SCHWARZ Indonesia
Graha Paramita 5th Floor
Jln. Denpasar Raya Blok D-2
+62 (21) 252 36 08
+62 (21) 252 36 07
sales@rsbj.rohde-schwarz.com
services@rsbj.rohde-schwarz.com
ROHDE & SCHWARZ IRAN
Groundfloor No. 1, 14th Street
Khaled Eslamboli (Vozara) Ave.
15117 Tehran
Ireland
siehe / see United Kingdom
Israel
EASTRONICS LTD.
Messtechnik / T&M Equipment
11 Rozanis St.
P.O.Box 39300
Tel Aviv 61392
Korea
ROHDE & SCHWARZ Korea Ltd.
83-29 Nonhyun-Dong, Kangnam-Ku
+254 (2) 55 80 88
+254 (2) 54 46 79
+82 (2) 514 45 46
+82 (2) 514 45 49
sales@rskor.rohde-schwarz.com
service@rskor.rohde-schwarz.com
Kuwait
Group Five Trading & Contracting Co.
Mezanine Floor
Al-Bana Towers
Ahmad Al Jaber Street
Sharq
+965 (244) 91 72/73/74
+965 (244) 95 28
jk_agarwal@yahoo.com
Latvia
ROHDE & SCHWARZ DANMARK A/S
Latvian Branch Office
Merkela iela 21-301
1050 Riga
+371 (7) 50 23 55
+371 (7) 50 23 60
rsdk@rsdk.rohde-schwarz.com
Lebanon
ROHDE & SCHWARZ Liaison Office
+966 (1) 465 64 28 Ext. 303
c/o Haji Abdullah Alireza Co. Ltd.
+966 (1) 465 64 28 Ext. 229
P.O.Box 361
chris.porzky@rsd.rohde-schwarz.com
Riyadh 11411
Lebanon
Netcom
Liechtenstein
siehe / see Switzerland
Lithuania
ROHDE & SCHWARZ DANMARK A/S
Lithuanian Office
Lukiskiu 5-228
2600 Vilnius
Luxembourg
siehe / see Belgium
Macedonia
siehe / see Slovenia
Malaysia
DAGANG TEKNIK SDN. BHD.
No. 9, Jalan SS 4D/2
Selangor Darul Ehsan
+91 (22) 26 30 18 10
+91 (22) 26 32 63 73
rsindiam@rsnl.net
Jakarta 12940
Iran
Excel Enterprises Ltd
Dunga Road
P.O.Box 42 788
Nairobi
Seoul 135-010
Hyderabad - 500 016
Indonesia
Kenya
+98 (21) 872 42 96
+98 (21) 871 90 12
rs-tehran@neda.net
+972 (3) 645 87 77
+972 (3) 645 86 66
david_hasky@easx.co.il
+370 (5) 239 50 10
+370 (5) 239 50 11
+60 (3) 27 03 55 68
+60 (3) 27 03 34 39
mey.nara@danik.com.my
47301 Petaling Jaya
Israel
J.M. Moss (Engineering) Ltd.
Kommunikationstechnik/ Communications
Equipment
9 Oded Street
P.O.Box 967
52109 Ramat Gan
+972 (3) 631 20 57
+972 (3) 631 40 58
jmmoss@zahav.net.il
Italy
ROHDE & SCHWARZ ITALIA S.p.a.
Centro Direzionale Lombardo
Via Roma 108
20060 Cassina de Pecchi (MI)
+39 (02) 95 70 42 03
+39 (02) 95 30 27 72
ornella.crippa@rsi.rohdeschwarz.com
Italy
ROHDE & SCHWARZ ITALIA S.p.a.
Via Tiburtina 1182
00156 Roma
+39 (06) 41 59 82 18
+39 (06) 41 59 82 70
Japan
ADVANTEST Corporation
RS Sales Department
1-32-1, Asahi-cho
Nerima-ku
Tokyo 179-0071
Jordan
Jordan Crown Engineering & Trading Co.
Jabal Amman, Second Circle
Youssef Ezzideen Street
P.O.Box 830414
Amman, 11183
Kazakhstan
ROHDE & SCHWARZ Kazakhstan
Representative Office Almaty
Pl. Respubliki 15
480013 Almaty
+81 (3) 39 30 41 90
+81 (3) 39 30 41 86
RSSales@advantest.co.jp
+962 (6) 462 17 29
+962 (6) 465 96 72
jocrown@go.com.jo
Malta
ITEC International Technology Ltd
B'Kara Road
San Gwann SGN 08
Mexico
Rohde & Schwarz de Mexico (RSMX)
S. de R.L. de C.V.
German Centre Oficina 4-2-2
Av. Santa FĂŠ 170
Col. Lomas de Santa FĂŠ
01210 Mexico D.F.
+52 (55) 85 03 99 13
+52 (55) 85 03 99 16
latinoamerica@rsd.rohdeschwarz.com
Mexico
Rohde & Schwarz de Mexico (RSMX)
Av. Prol. Americas No. 1600, 2° Piso
Col. Country Club
Guadalajara, Jal.
Mexico CP, 44610
+52 (33) 36 78 91 70
+52 (33) 36 78 92 00
Moldavia
siehe / see Romania
Netherlands
ROHDE & SCHWARZ NEDERLAND B.V.
Perkinsbaan 1
3439 ND Nieuwegein
New Zealand
Nichecom
1 Lincoln Ave.
+356 (21) 37 43 00 or 37 43 29
+356 (21) 37 43 53
sales@itec.com.mt
+31 (30) 600 17 00
+31 (30) 600 17 99
info@rsn.rohde-schwarz.com
+64 (4) 232 32 33
+64 (4) 232 32 30
rob@nichecom.co.nz
Tawa, Wellington
+7 (32) 72 63 55 55
+7 (32) 72 63 46 33
RS-Kazakhstan@RUS-RohdeSchwarz.com
Nicaragua
siehe / see Mexico
Nigeria
Ferrostaal Abuja
Plot 3323, Barada Close
P.O.Box 8513, Wuse
Off Amazon Street
Maitama, Abuja
+234 (9) 413 52 51
+234 (9) 413 52 50
fsabuja@rosecom.net
Adressen/Addresses
Norway
ROHDE & SCHWARZ NORGE AS
Enebakkveien 302 B
1188 Oslo
Oman
Mustafa Sultan Science & Industry Co.LLC.
For Test & Measurement ONLY
Way No. 3503
Building No. 241
Postal Code 112
Al Khuwair, Muscat
+47 (23) 38 66 00
+47 (23) 38 66 01
Spain
ROHDE & SCHWARZ ESPANA S.A.
Salcedo, 11
+34 (91) 334 10 70
+34 (91) 329 05 06
rses@rses-rohde-schwarz.com
28034 Madrid
Pakistan
Siemens Pakistan
23, West Jinnah Avenue
Islamabad
Panama
siehe / see Mexico
Papua-New
Guinea
siehe / see Australia
Philippines
MARCOM INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT, Inc.
6-L Vernida I Condominium
120 Amorsolo St.
Legaspi Village
Makati City/ Philippines 1229
+968 636 000
+968 607 066
m-aziz@mustafasultan.com
+63 (2) 813 29 31
+63 (2) 810 58 07
marcom@i-next.net
ROHDE & SCHWARZ Ăsterreich SP.z o.o.
+48 (22) 860 64 94
Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce
+48 (22) 860 64 99
ul. Stawki 2, Pietro 28
rohdepl@rsoe.rohde-schwarz.com
00-193 Warszawa
Portugal
Rohde & Schwarz Portugal, Lda.
+351 (21) 415 57 00
+351 (21) 415 57 10
telerus@mail.telepac.pt
Alameda Antonio Sergio, n° 7
R/C, Sala A
2795-023 Linda-a-Velha
Russian
Federation
Saudi Arabia
LANKA AVIONICS
658/1/1, Negombo Road
Mattumagala
Ragama
Sudan
SolarMan Co. Ltd.
P.O.Box 11 545
North of Fraouq Cementry 6/7/9 Bldg. 16
Karthoum
Sweden
ROHDE & SCHWARZ SVERIGE AB
Marketing Div.
Flygfältsgatan 15
128 30 Skarpnäck
Switzerland
Roschi Rohde & Schwarz AG
MĂźhlestr. 7
3063 Ittigen
Syria
Electro Scientific Office
+92 (51) 227 22 00
+92 (51) 227 54 98
reza.bokhary@siemens.com.pk
Poland
Romania
Sri Lanka
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Representation Office Bucharest
Str. Uranus 98
Sc. 2, Et. 5, Ap. 36
76102 Bucuresti, Sector 5
+40 (21) 410 68 46
+40 (21) 411 20 13
rohdero@rsoe.rohde-schwarz.com
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Representative Office Moscow
119180, Yakimanskaya nab., 2
Moscow
+7 (095) 745 88 50 to 53
+7 (095) 745 88 54
rs-russia@rsru.rohde-schwarz.com
Mr. Chris Porzky
+966 (1) 465 64 28 Ext. 303
ROHDE & SCHWARZ International GmbH
+966 (1) 465 6428 Ext. 229
c/o Haji Abdullah Alireza Co. Ltd. chris.porzky@rsd.rohde-schwarz.com
P.O.Box 361
Riyadh 11411
Saudi Arabia
GENTEC
SerbiaMontenegro
Representative Office Belgrade
Tose Jovanovica 7
11030 Beograd
Slovak
Republic
Specialne systemy a software, a.s.
Svrcia ul.
841 04 Bratislava
Slovenia
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Representation Ljubljana
Tbilisijska 89
1000 Ljubljana
South Africa
Protea Data Systems (Pty.) Ltd.
Communications and Measurement Division
Private Bag X19
Bramley 2018
+27 (11) 719 57 00
+27 (11) 786 58 91
unicm@protea.co.za
South Africa
Protea Data Systems (Pty.) Ltd.
Cape Town Branch
Unit G9, Centurion Business Park
Bosmandam Road
Milnerton
Cape Town, 7441
+27 (21) 555 36 32
+27 (21) 555 42 67
unicm@protea.co.za
+381 (11) 305 50 25
+381 (11) 305 50 24
+94 (1) 95 66 78
+94 (1) 95 83 11
lankavio@sltnet.lk
+249 (11) 47 31 08
+249 (11) 47 31 38
solarman29@hotmail.com
+46 (8) 605 19 00
+46 (8) 605 19 80
info@rss.se
+41 (31) 922 15 22
+41 (31) 921 81 01
sales@roschi.rohde-schwarz.com
+963 (11) 231 59 74
+963 (11) 231 88 75
memo@hamshointl.com
Baghdad Street
Dawara Clinical Lab. Bldg
P.O.Box 8162
Damascus
Taiwan
Lancer Communication Co. Ltd.
for Div. 1 and 7
16F, No. 30, Pei-Ping East Road
Taipei
+886 (2) 23 91 10 02
+886 (2) 23 95 82 82
info@lancercomm.com.tw
Taiwan
System Communication Co. Ltd.
for Div. 2 and 8
16F, No. 30, Pei-Ping East Road
Taipei
+886 (2) 23 91 10 02
+886 (2) 23 95 82 82
info@lancercomm.com.tw
Tanzania
SSTL Group
P.O. Box 7512
Dunga Street Plot 343/345
Dar es Salaam
Thailand
Schmidt Electronics (Thailand) Ltd.
+66 (2) 643 13 30 to 39
63 Government Housing Bank Bldg.
+66 (2) 643 13 40
Tower II, 19th floor, Rama 9 Rd.
kamthoninthuyot@schmidtthailand.c
Huaykwang, Bangkapi
om
Bangkok 10320
Thailand
TPP Operation Co., Ltd.
41/5 Mooban Tarinee
Boromrajchonnee Road
Talingchan, Bangkok 10170
Trinidad
&Tobago
siehe / see Mexico
Tunisia
TELETEK
71, Rue Alain Savary
Residence Alain Savary (C64)
1003 Tunis
Turkey
ROHDE & SCHWARZ International GmbH
Liaison Office Istanbul
Bagdad Cad. 191/3, Arda Apt. B-Blok
81030 Selamicesme-Istanbul
Ukraine
ROHDE & SCHWARZ
Representative Office Kiev
4, Patris Loumoumba ul
01042 Kiev
United Arab
Emirates
ROHDE & SCHWARZ International GmbH
Liaison Office Abu Dhabi
P.O. Box 31156
Abu Dhabi
+255 (22) 276 00 37
+255 (22) 276 02 93
sstl@twiga.com
+66 (2) 880 93 47
+66 (2) 880 93 47
thipsukon@tpp-operation.com
+421 (2) 65 42 24 88
+421 (2) 65 42 07 68
stefan.lozek@special.sk
+386 (1) 423 46 51
+386 (1) 423 46 11
rohdesi@rsoe.rohde-schwarz.com
+90 (216) 385 19 17
+90 (216) 385 19 18
rsturk@superonline.com
+38 (044) 268 60 55
+38 (044) 268 83 64
rohdeukr@rsoe.rohde-schwarz.com
+971 (2) 633 56 70
+971 (2) 633 56 71
michael.rogler@rsd.rohdeschwarz.com
Adressen/Addresses
United Arab
Emirates
ROHDE & SCHWARZ Bick Mobile
Communication
P.O.Box 17466
+971 (4) 883 71 35
+971 (4) 883 71 36
www.rsbick.de
Dubai
United Arab
Emirates
ROHDE & SCHWARZ Emirates L.L.C.
Ahmed Al Nasri Building, Mezzanine Floor,
P.O.Box 31156
Off old Airport Road
Behind new GEMACO Furniture
Abu Dhabi
United
Kingdom
ROHDE & SCHWARZ UK Ltd.
Ancells Business Park
Fleet
Hampshire
GU 51 2UZ England
Uruguay
AEROMARINE S.A.
Cerro Largo 1497
11200 Montevideo
USA
ROHDE & SCHWARZ, Inc.
Broadcast & Comm. Equipment
(US Headquarters)
7150-K Riverwood Drive
Columbia, MD 21046
USA
Rohde & Schwarz Inc.
Marketing & Support Center / T&M
Equipment
2540 SW Alan Blumlein Way
M/S 58-925
Beaverton, OR 97077-0001
+1 (503) 627 26 84
+1 (503) 627 25 65
info@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com
USA
Rohde & Schwarz Inc.
Systems & EMI Products
8080 Tristar Drive
Suite 120
Irving, Texas 75063
+1 (469) 713 53 00
+1 (469) 713 53 01
info@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com
Venezuela
EQUILAB TELECOM C.A.
Centro Seguros La Paz
Piso 6, Local E-61
Ava. Francisco de Miranda
Boleita, Caracas 1070
Venezuela
REPRESENTACIONES BOPIC S.A.
Calle C-4
Qta. San Jose
Urb. Caurimare
Caracas 1061
+58 (2) 129 85 21 29
+58 (2) 129 85 39 94
incotr@cantv.net
Vietnam
Schmidt Vietnam Co., (H.K.) Ltd.,
Representative Office in Hanoi
Intern. Technology Centre
8/F, HITC Building
239 Xuan Thuy Road
Cau Giay, Tu Liem
Hanoi
+84 (4) 834 61 86
+84 (4) 834 61 88
svnhn@schmidtgroup.com
West Indies
siehe / see Mexico
GEDIS GmbH
Sophienblatt 100
Postfach 22 01
24021 Kiel
+971 (2) 631 20 40
+971 (2) 631 30 40
rsuaeam@emirates.net.ae
+44 (1252) 81 88 88 (sales)
+44 (1252) 81 88 18 (service)
+44 (1252) 81 14 47
sales@rsuk.rohde-schwarz.com
+598 (2) 400 39 62
+598 (2) 401 85 97
mjn@aeromarine.com.uy
+1 (410) 910 78 00
+1 (410) 910 78 01
rsatv@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com
rsacomms@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com
+58 (2) 12 34 46 26
+58 (2) 122 39 52 05
r_ramirez@equilabtelecom.com
+49 (431) 600 51-0
+49 (431) 600 51-11
sales@gedis-online.de
Safety Instructions
This unit has been designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the
manufacturerâs plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards.
To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, the user must observe all instructions and warnings
given in this operating manual.
Safety-related symbols used on equipment and documentation from R&S:
Observe
operating
instructions
1.
Weight
indication for
units >18 kg
PE terminal
Ground
terminal
The unit may be used only in the operating conditions and positions specified by the manufacturer. Unless otherwise agreed, the following
applies to R&S products:
IP degree of protection 2X, pollution severity 2
overvoltage category 2, only for indoor use, altitude max. 2000 m.
The unit may be operated only from supply networks fused with max. 16 A.
Unless specified otherwise in the data sheet, a
tolerance of Âą10% shall apply to the nominal
voltage and of Âą5% to the nominal frequency.
2.
For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms
> 30 V, suitable measures should be taken to
avoid any hazards.
(using, for example, appropriate measuring
equipment, fusing, current limiting, electrical
separation, insulation).
3.
If the unit is to be permanently wired, the PE
terminal of the unit must first be connected to
the PE conductor on site before any other connections are made. Installation and cabling of
the unit to be performed only by qualified technical personnel.
4.
For permanently installed units without built-in
fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective devices, the supply circuit must be fused such as
to provide suitable protection for the users and
equipment.
5.
Prior to switching on the unit, it must be ensured
that the nominal voltage set on the unit matches
the nominal voltage of the AC supply network.
If a different voltage is to be set, the power fuse
of the unit may have to be changed accordingly.
6.
Units of protection class I with disconnectible
AC supply cable and appliance connector may
be operated only from a power socket with
earthing contact and with the PE conductor connected.
095.1000 Sheet 17
Danger!
Shock hazard
Warning!
Hot surfaces
Ground
Attention!
Electrostatic
sensitive devices require
special care
7.
It is not permissible to interrupt the PE conductor intentionally, neither in the incoming cable
nor on the unit itself as this may cause the unit
to become electrically hazardous.
Any extension lines or multiple socket outlets
used must be checked for compliance with relevant safety standards at regular intervals.
8.
If the unit has no power switch for disconnection
from the AC supply, the plug of the connecting
cable is regarded as the disconnecting device.
In such cases it must be ensured that the power
plug is easily reachable and accessible at all
times (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m).
Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC
supply.
If units without power switches are integrated in
racks or systems, a disconnecting device must
be provided at system level.
9.
Applicable local or national safety regulations
and rules for the prevention of accidents must
be observed in all work performed.
Prior to performing any work on the unit or
opening the unit, the latter must be disconnected from the supply network.
Any adjustments, replacements of parts, maintenance or repair may be carried out only by
authorized R&S technical personnel.
Only original parts may be used for replacing
parts relevant to safety (eg power switches,
power transformers, fuses). A safety test must
be performed after each replacement of parts
relevant to safety.
(visual inspection, PE conductor test, insulationresistance, leakage-current measurement, functional test).
continued overleaf
Safety Instructions
10. Ensure that the connections with information
technology equipment comply with IEC950 /
EN60950.
11. Lithium batteries must not be exposed to high
temperatures or fire.
Keep batteries away from children.
If the battery is replaced improperly, there is
danger of explosion. Only replace the battery by
R&S type (see spare part list).
Lithium batteries are suitable for environmentally-friendly disposal or specialized recycling.
Dispose them into appropriate containers, only.
Do not short-circuit the battery.
12. Equipment returned or sent in for repair must be
packed in the original packing or in packing with
electrostatic and mechanical protection.
095.1000 Sheet 18
13. Electrostatics via the connectors may dam-
age the equipment. For the safe handling and
operation of the equipment,
appropriate
measures against electrostatics should be implemented.
14. The outside of the instrument is suitably
cleaned using a soft, lint-free dustcloth. Never
use solvents such as thinners, acetone and
similar things, as they may damage the front
panel labeling or plastic parts.
15. Any additional safety instructions given in this
manual are also to be observed.
Fßr Betrieb im Europäischen Wirtschaftsraum (EWR) und zivilen Einsatz.
Hinweis gemäà dem Gesetz Ăźber âFunkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungenâ (FTEG) und der Europäischen Richtlinie 1999/5/EG:
Dieses Produkt darf innerhalb des EWR nicht uneingeschränkt betrieben werden, da
der verwendete Frequenzbereich auf nicht harmonisierten Bändern erfolgt. Nationale
Vorschriften / Genehmigungen sind zu beachten.
Das Gerät ist 4 Wochen vor Inverkehrbringen bei der jeweils zuständigen nationalen
BehĂśrde fĂźr die Frequenzhoheit zu notifizieren. Informationen hierzu im Internet unter
folgender Adresse: http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/rtte/spectr.htm
For operation in the European Economic Area (EEA) and for civil use.
Note pursuant to the German Radio and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive (FTEG) and the European R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC:
Operation of this product within the EEA is subject to restrictions since the frequency
bands used are not harmonized. National provisions / authorizations shall be
complied with.
The product shall be notified to the competent national frequency management
authority four weeks before the product is put on the market.
For more information refer to: http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/rtte/spectr.htm
6012.1234.54 â 1 / 2
KONFORMITĂTSERKLĂRUNG gemäà dem Gesetz Ăźber Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG)
und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in accordance with the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Act (FTEG) and Directive
1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)
Zertifikat-Nr.: / Certificate No.:
2003-19
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, dass die Funkanlage
This is to certify that the radio equipment
Gerätetyp / Equipment Type
Materialnummer / Stock No.
Benennung / Designation
XT4410A
XT4460A
6102.0307.xx
6102.1103.xx
VHF/UHF Transceiver
VHF/UHF Transceiver
XD4410A
6122.1109.xx
UHF Transceiver
Geräteklasse: / Equipment class:
2.12 â Infrastructure equipment
bei bestimmungsgemäĂer Verwendung den grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den Ăźbrigen
einschlägigen Bestimmungen des FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.
complies with the essential requirements of §3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the R&TTE
Directive), when used for its intended purpose.
â˘
Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäà § 3 (1) 1 (Artikel 3 (1) a))
â˘
Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1 (Article 3(1) a))
â˘
Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf die elektromagn. Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))
â˘
Protection requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility § 3(1)(2), (Article 3(1)(b))
â˘
MaĂnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Funkfrequenzspektrums
â˘
Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum
â˘
Luftschnittstelle bei Funkanlagen gemäà § 3(2) (Artikel 3(2))
â˘
Air interface of the radio systems pursuant to § 3(2) (Article 3(2))
Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:
Harmonized standards applied:
EN 60950:1992+A1:1993+A2:1993+A3:1995+A4:1997
EN 300339 V1.1.1 (1998-06)
Einhaltung der grundlegenden Anforderungen auf andere Art und
Weise (hierzu verwendete Standards/Spezifikationen):
Other means of proving conformity with the essential requirements
(standards/specifications used):
ETSI EN 301489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09)
ETSI EN 301489-22 V1.1.1 (2000-12)
EN 300676 V1.2.1 (2000-05)
RegTP 321 ZV 39
Anbringung des CE-Zeichens ab: 2003 / Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2003
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
MĂźhldorfstr. 15, D-81671 MĂźnchen
MĂźnchen, den 26.05.2003
Zentrales Qualitätsmanagement FS-QZ / Becker
Munich, 2003-05-26
Central Quality Management
6076.0822.12.02
- C.1 / C.2 -
Radio Communication Systems
Division
Support Center
Telephone:
+49 (0) 180 5124242
Fax:
e-mail:
+49 (0) 180 4129-13777
Customersupport@rohde-schwarz.com
If you have any questions on Radio Communication System products, our support center staff will
provide any assistance possible.
Hotline services are available:
Monday through Friday from 08:00 to 17:00 (GMT + 1).
Additionally you may also contact us round the clock via e-mail at the address stated above.
6012.1234.12.06 - 1 / 2
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
1RWH
This manual deals with the following Software Packages and M3SR Transceivers:
Software Package
Software Package
Software Package
Software Package
UHF Transceiver
DS 4410A
DS 4410A
DS 4410A
DS 4410A
XD 4410A
6102.2068.05
6102.2051.04
6102.2097.03
6102.2080.03
6122.1109.03
fullband, with Link 11
UHF Transceiver
XD 4410A
6122.1109.13
with Link 11,
and integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
UHF Transceiver
XD 4410A
6122.1109.15
with Antenna Interface
GI 4403, mod. 02
and integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
UHF Transceiver
XD 4410A
6122.1109.31
with Guard Receiver
ET 4400G
and integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
VHF / UHF Transceiver
XT 4410A
6102.0307.03
with integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
VHF / UHF Transceiver
XT 4410A
6102.0307.13
with Link 11,
and integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
VHF / UHF Transceiver
XT 4410A
6102.0307.22
with UHF Filter FD 4430
and integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
VHF / UHF Transceiver
XT 4410A
6102.0307.31
with Guard Receiver
ET 4400G
and integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
VHF / UHF Transceiver
XT 4410A
6102.0307.41
with Link 11,
Guard Receiver ET 4400G
and integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
VHF / UHF Transceiver
XT 4410A
6102.0307.42
with UHF Filter FD 4430,
Guard Receiver ET 4400G,
and integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
VHF / UHF Transceiver
VHF / UHF Transceiver
VHF / UHF Transceiver
VHF / UHF Transceiver
XT 4460A
XT 4460A
XT 4460A
XT 4460A
6102.1103.02
6102.1103.03
6102.1103.13
6102.1103.31
without OCXO
VHF / UHF Transceiver
XT 4460A
6102.1103.41
with Link 11 and
Guard Receiver ET 4400G
6076.0822.12.02
fullband
with Link 11
with integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C
with Link 11
with Guard Receiver
ET 4400G
â N.1 / N.2 â
Radio Communication Systems Division
Documentation Dept.
MĂźhldorfstr. 15
'0ÂQFKHQ
Fax +49 89 4129 12690
(9$/8$7,212)0$18$/6
here:
2SHUDWRUÂśV0DQXDO,G1R065 7UDQVFHLYHU; $
; $
Dear Sirs,
we constantly try to improve our technical manuals, so that you, our customer gets the
best possible benefit from them.
In order to become better, we need your help and your opinion on the manuals. Therefore, we would like you to evaluate the accompanying manual and tell us your opinion
about it. In order to make the job easy for you, we have designed the following matrix.
Please tick where appropriate.
1.
What is your general impression of the manual?
2.
lousy
not so good
quite ok
good
excellent
How do you assess the detail and depth of information in general?
3.
far too
detailed
too much
information
all information
contained
not enough
information
important items
missing
How do you assess the size of the manual in general?
4.
far too
bulky
a bit too
thick
appropriate to
the equipment
easy to
handle
very clearly
presented
How do you assess the structure of the manual?
5.
opaque
difficult to
understand
quite ok
easy to find
information
very userfriendly
How do you assess the understandability (language) of manual?
very difficult
to follow
complicated
language
normal to
understand
easy to
understand
very userfriendly
0803
6076.0822.12.02 - 001
please turn over
(9$/8$7,212)0$18$/6
2SHUDWRUÂśV0DQXDO,G1R065 7UDQVFHLYHU; $
; $
6.
7.
8.
How do you rate the number of illustrations?
far too
many
a bit too
many
just about
right
could be
more
not enough
illustrations
How do you rate the quality of illustrations?
lousy
not so good
quite ok
good
excellent
How do you assess the balance of text to illustrations?
lousy
not so good
quite ok
good
excellent
Further Comments and Suggestions for Improvement:
Date / Signature / Department
0803
6076.0822.12.02 - 002
065 75$16&(,9(56 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
)LUVW(GLWLRQDQG5HYLVLRQV
First edition...........Change Index 01......May 2003
First revision...........Change Index 02......August 2003
/,672)())(&7,9(3$*(6
Page No.
Change index /
date of issue
M.1 to M.2
01
05 / 03
1/2
095.1000:
sheets 17 + 18
6012.1234.54:
1/2
6076.0822.12:
C.1 / C.2
6012.1234.12:
1/2
6076.0822.12:
N.1 / N.2
001 to 002
G.1 / G.2
V.1 to V.4
B.1 to B.2
H.1 / H.2
Z.1 / Z.2
I.1 to I.10
02
Page No.
Change index /
date of issue
08 / 03
3.74 to 3.76
3.77
3.78 to 3.84
01
02
01
05 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
03 / 01
4.1 to 4.26
01
05 / 03
07 / 02
5.1 to 5.2
01
05 / 03
02
08 / 03
06
10 / 01
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
02
08 / 03
08 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
05 / 03
05 / 03
05 / 03
08 / 03
A1.1 to A1.15
A1.16
A1.17 to A1.22
A1.23 to A1.24
A1.25 to A1.27
A1.28
A1.29
A1.30
A1.31 to A1.38
PD 0757.6691.22
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
05 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
02 / 03
6076.0822.12:
A2.1 to A2.12
02
08 / 03
3/4
0.1 to 0.4
01
02
05 / 03
08 / 03
A3.1 to A3.4
01
05 / 03
1.1 to 1.10
01
05 / 03
2.1 to 2.7
2.8 to 2.44
2.45 to 2.52
6102.4002.01DF
01
02
01
01
05 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
06 / 01
6076.0822.12
3.1 to 3.50
3.51
3.52 to 3.57
3.58
3.59 to 3.60
3.61 to 3.62
3.63 to 3.71
3.72 to 3.73
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
05 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
08 / 03
05 / 03
08 / 03
6076.0822.12.02
â G.1 / G.2 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
/LVWRI$EEUHYLDWLRQV
$&
$&&
$'&
$''5
$'9&'
$)
$),
$)3
$)8
$*&
$/&
$0$(
$03
$6.
$7&
$7(&
$77
$8'),/
alternating current
according
analog-to-digital converter
address
advanced
audio frequency
audio frequency interface
audio frequency panel
audio frequency unit
automatic gain control
(IF level)
automatic level control
amplitude modulation
amplifier
amplitude shift keying
air traffic control
active time error correction
attenuator
audio filter
%$77
%%
%(5
%,
%,7
%,7(
%1&
%3
%:
battery
baseband
bit error rate
break-in
built-in test
built-in test equipment
(RF connector type)
bandpass filter
bandwidth
&$/
&$55
&%,7
&&8
&'
&*&
&+&+$1
&+$5
&/
&/(:
control unit
calibrate
carrier
continuous built-in test
comfort control unit
carrier detection
cipher ground control
channel
character
communication line
conventional Link Eleven
waveform
clipper
clock
clear
carrier-sense multiple access
coder-decoder equipment
communication line
communication mode
component
complete
communication security
conference
contrast
crypto override
cipher
control panel
current page
cipher
communication security
cipher text
control
clear to send
&/,3
&/.
&/5
&60$
&2'(&
&20/,1(
&200
&203
&203
&206(&
&21)(5
&2175
&25
&3
&3
&3
&3+
&6(&
&7
&75/
&76
6076.0822.12.01
&8
&85
&96'
control unit
current
continuously variable slope
delta modulation
'$&
G%
'&
'&'
'()
'(9
'(9
',1
data
digital
digital-to-analog converter
decibel
direct current
data carrier detect
definition
device
deviation
Deutsche Industrienorm
(German Industrial Standard)
display
diphase
dual-port RAM
delayed PTT
digital signal processor
dual-tone multiple frequency
',63
'3
'35
'377
'63
'70)
(&&0
(&
((3520
(0&
(0&/
(17
(20
(30
(55
(6&
(76,
(;7
))
),/
)0)(
)0&
)07
)3
)3*$
)5(4)54
)6.
):
*1'
*07
electronic counter counter
measures
European Community
(standard)
electrical erasable programmable read-only memory
electromagnetic compatibility
emergency clear
enter
end of message
electronic protection
measures
error
escape
European Telecommunictions Standard Institute
external
fixed frequency
filter
frequency modulation
frequency management center
frequency management
training
front panel
field-programmable gate array
frequency
frequency shift keying
firmware
*5*5[
guard receiver
gateway
ground
Greenwich mean time
(see UTC)
guard receiver
+$,/
+'
+4
hailing
half duplex
Have Quick
â V.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
+:
+:0
hardware
hardware module
07%)
0775
mean time between failures
mean time to repair
,%,7
,&$2
initiated built-in test
International Civil Aviation
Organization
identification
interface design document
International Electrotechnical
Committee
Internet engineering task force
intermediate frequency
interface
illumination
impedance
input
inventory
input/output
Internet protocol
Infrared Data Association,
here also: infrared data access
integrated services digital
network
International Telecommunictions Union (ITU standards)
1$72
newton
North Atlantic Treaty
Organization
narrowband
net entry
number
,'
,''
,(&
,(7)
,)
,)
,//80
,03
,1
,19
,2
,3
,U'$
,6'1
,78
.''
.('
.(<%'
.)0&
.0&
/$1
/&$
/'
/('
/(9
/1
/2
/2&
/2*
/26
/3
/58
/6%
/:
065
0$,17
0('
0+6
0+]
0,6&
00&
00,
02'
02'02'8
021,7
05.
06%
â V.2 â
key distribution device
key entry device
keyboard
key and frequency
management center
key management center
local
local area network
logic cell array (SW-programmable gate array)
low distortion
light-emitting diode
level
low noise
local oscillator
local
logical
line of sight
lowpass filter
line-replaceable unit
least significant bit
low
main receiver
multiband, multimode and
multirole surface radio
maintenance
medium
management and handling
system
megahertz
miscellaneous
mission management center
man-machine interface
module
modulation
monitor
marker
most significant bit
1%
1(
12
2&;2
2))6
20&
operational
oven-controlled crystal
oscillator
offset
operation management center
3$
3$5$06
3%,7
3&%
3,1
3//
30
325
32:
33
330
330
336
35(9
352'
3527
36
37
377
3:5
power amplifier
parameters
power-on built-in test
printed circuit board
personal identification number
phase-locked loop
phase modulation
plain override
power
preset page
parts per million
pulse per minute
pulse per second
previous
production
protection
power supply
plain text
push to talk
power
5$0
5&
5&%
5'%
5(&
5()
5(0
5)
5)&
5,
50%
566,
radio
random access memory
remote control
radio control bus
radio data bus
receive
reference
remote
radio frequency
request for commands
ring indicator
radio module bus
received signal strength
indicator
ready to send
receiver, reception
receive data
576
5;
5['
61
6$7851
6(5
6,'(71
6/
612
62&
63
6464/
648*
signal-to-noise ratio
Second Generation Anti-jam
Tactical UHF Radio for NATO
serial
sidetone
slot
serial number
software options controller
spacing
squelch
squelch guard receiver
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
6480
65&
6767$7
677(
683
6:
6<1&
6<17
6:
6:0
squelch main receiver
source
status
special-to-type test equipment
supply
software
synchronization
synthesizer
software
software module
7%'
7%5/
7&;2
training
type
to be defined
to be released later
temperature-compensated
crystal oscillator
time division multiple access
time figure of merit
thin-film transistor
total harmonic distortion
time of day
transmission security
transmitter, transmission
transmit data
7'0$
7)20
7)7
7+'
72'
75$16(&
7;
7['
6076.0822.12.01
89
8+)
81&3
87&
UHF / VHF
ultra high frequency
unciphered
universal time coordinated
9$&
9&;2
9'&
9'(
9(5
9+)
92/7
923
933
96
96:5
voice
voltage
volt alternating current
voltage-controlled oscillator
volt direct current
Verein Deutscher Elektrotecniker (German Standard)
version
very high frequency
voltage
operating voltage
peak-to-peak voltage
switched voltage
voltage-standing wave ratio
:%
:2'
watt
wideband
word of day
â V.3 / V.4 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
'HILQLWLRQV
Check
In appropriate measurements by means of the specified test
equipment proper functioning of a unit or module is established.
Discolouration
Components such as e.g. connectors and printed circuit
boards are examined if they have changed colour due to temperature effects and thus differ widely from their normal condition.
Disconnect
Pull off connector.
Examine
In case of trouble the unit / module or components such as
e.g. connectors, are to be thoroughly checked for obvious mechanical damage.
Functional check
This means that components / modules / units are checked for
proper functioning while installed.
Hazardous voltages
Voltages > 30 Vrms or 50 Vpp (AC) or 50 V (DC)
Make sure
Ascertain whether all mentioned requirements are met or all
measures are taken to establish the required condition.
Open
Access is to be gained to the unit / module by observing the
given instructions and safety precautions.
Perfect condition
This means that a component / module / unit has to be in a
state which does not give cause to complaints.
Replacement
In case of trouble the replacement of modules is carried out in
order to localize and eliminate the fault.
Replace
Components / modules / units which - due to damage and / or
other defects - no longer meet the respective requirements or
components / modules / units which during troubleshooting
were identified as the cause of fault, are to be replaced.
6076.0822.12.01
â B.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
Visual examination
â B.2 â
This is a visual inspection of the outer appearance and completeness of a component / module / unit without manual interference by the examiner. This does not include the necessary
preparations and finishing work such as e.g. opening and closing of covers or similar.
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
1RWLFHV
The three different notices used in this Operatorâs Manual have the following meaning:
:$51,1*
7KLVKHDGLQJLVXVHGWRLQGLFDWHWKDWLQDFFXUDWHREVHUYDQFHRUQRQREVHUYDQFH
RILQVWUXFWLRQVRUPHWKRGVFDQFDXVHLQMXU\RUHYHQIDWDODFFLGHQWVRUGXULQJDQ
RSHUDWLRQGHVFULEHGKD]DUGRXVPDWHULDOFDQEHVHWIUHHLQWKHXQLWRUV\VWHP
&$87,21
7KLVKHDGLQJLVXVHGWRLQGLFDWHWKDWLQDFFXUDWHREVHUYDQFHRUQRQREVHUYDQFHRILQ
VWUXFWLRQVRUPHWKRGVFDQFDXVHGDPDJHWRWKHXQLW
1RWH
7KLVKHDGLQJLVXVHGWRGUDZWKHUHDGHUÂśVDWWHQWLRQWRDSDUWLFXODUIDFW
This manual contains the following âWarningâ:
:$51,1*
:HDUJRJJOHVZKHQZRUNLQJZLWKFRPSUHVVHGDLU
LQRUGHUWRDYRLGH\HLQMXULHV
6076.0822.12.01
â H.1 / H.2 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
8VHU,QIRUPDWLRQ
3XUSRVHRIWKH0DQXDO
This Manual provides all information the operators and service staff need to maintain level 1 of
repairs.
lt contains all necessary information and instructions concerning the installation, putting into
operation and control of the unit, plus troubleshooting instructions down to unit level. In case of
trouble this allows straightforward error localization as well as easy replacement of the unit.
:HUHFRPPHQGWRNHHSFRPSOHWHVSDUHXQLWVLQVWRUH
0HDVXULQJ8QLWV
In this Manual the basic SI measuring units and units coherently derived from them are used
by preference. In exceptional cases units legally derived from the SI units acc. to DIN1301 may
also be used.
6\PEROV
The different symbols used in this Manual have the following meaning:
= emphasizing / setting off general facts
â˘
= special remark
= single action
Ă
= setting off general facts
6076.0822.12.01
â Z.1 / Z.2 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
,QGH[
AC/DC..........................................................2.19
Accessories..................................................1.10
Acknowledgement....................................... A2.1
Activates / deactivates operation with
the connected
UHF amplifier .........................................3.53
VHF amplifier .........................................3.53
Activating a specific user page ....................3.23
ACTIVE ........................................................3.57
ADD ADDR ..................................................3.77
Address....................................................... A2.1
ADDRESS LIST... ..............................3.36, 3.77
Addressing .................................................. A2.2
Addressing .......................................Range A2.2
ADR = 400U.............................................. A1.29
ADR = 999 ................................................ A1.28
ADVANCED .................................................2.29
AF AGC........................................................2.38
AF interface 1 connector X26 ................... A1.10
AF interface 2 connector X25 ..................... A1.9
AFI .................................................................1.6
AFI PARAMETERS......................................3.47
ALC DECAY.................................................3.47
ALL...............................................................3.32
AM.......................................................2.36, 3.52
AM MOD ......................................................3.52
Antenna connector X30 ............................ A1.13
Application examples ...................................3.83
Assigns the comline or guard receiver
to the audio output at the front panel ...........3.62
Assigns the selected audio port
to the comline...............................................3.58
Assigns the selected device to a comline ....3.59
ATTACK.......................................................3.50
Audio frequency interface ..............................1.6
AUDIO FRONTP... ......................................3.61
AUDIO MAPPING ........................................3.58
AUDIO MAPPING... ....................................3.58
Backup batteries ............................................5.1
BAND ...........................................................2.43
Basic cabling..................................................2.4
BATT............................................................2.19
Battery connector X32 .............................. A1.14
BIT control unit.............................................4.18
BIT design......................................................4.2
BIT radio ........................................................4.3
BITRATE......................................................3.35
BITS/CHAR..................................................3.35
Block diagram ................................................1.7
6076.0822.12.02
BRIGHT .......................................................3.81
Built-in test (BIT) ............................................4.2
Button RESET .............................................2.14
Cable .............................................................2.4
Cabling to be made at the
front...................................................2.5, 2.7
rear ...................................................2.4, 2.6
CARR...........................................................2.19
CBIT...............................................................4.2
CBIT... ..................................................4.6, 4.22
CHAN SP............................................2.38, 3.69
Change report............................................. A2.4
CHANGE TYPE ...........................................3.77
Changing of the
gateway address...........................3.38, 3.79
own IP address .............................3.38, 3.79
own logical address ......................3.38, 3.79
subnet mask .................................3.38, 3.79
Characteristics of data transmission ........... A2.2
Checking........................................................2.1
Cipher Unit KY58 ...........................................3.5
CL ................................................................3.44
CL1 ..............................................................3.32
Cleaning.........................................................5.2
CLEAR LIST .........................................4.8, 4.24
Clears the complete error list in
Menu 420.................................................4.8
Menu 820...............................................4.24
Client..............................................................1.6
CLIP LEV .....................................................3.51
CLIPPER .....................................................2.37
CLK SRC .....................................................3.46
Code No. ............................................3.33, 3.73
CODEC........................................................3.47
Codes ......................................................... A2.5
Comline..........................................................3.2
COMLINE SESSION ...................................2.28
COMM ................................................2.37, 3.69
Communication Modes ..................................3.3
Configuration ........................................3.6, 3.26
CONNECT ..........................................2.30, 3.53
Connection of peripheral equipment......... A1.16
Connectives ................................................ A2.4
CONTR ........................................................3.81
CONTROL PORT... ....................................3.34
Control scenario of one transceiver and
two control units...........................................2.31
Control Unit GB 4000C ..................................1.4
Control Unit RESET.....................................2.17
Controls .......................................................2.18
COUNT ........................................................3.65
â I.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
CU................................................................2.19
CU ADDRESS ROUTE................................3.78
CU CBIT DETAILS.......................................4.23
CU CBIT RESULTS .....................................4.22
CU DISPLAY PARAMS ...............................3.80
CU ERROR DETAILS..................................4.25
CU ERROR LIST .........................................4.24
CU IBIT DETAILS ........................................4.20
CU IBIT RESULTS.......................................4.19
CU INVENTORY..........................................3.72
CU INVENTORY DETAILS..........................3.73
CU MAINTENANCE............................3.71, 4.18
CU maintenance PIN ...................................3.24
CU SYSTEM PIN .........................................3.27
CU... MAINT........................................3.71, 4.18
Current page area........................................3.23
DATE ..................................................3.40, 3.80
DC IN connector X31 ................................ A1.13
DECAY.........................................................3.50
DEFAULT MODE.........................................3.68
DEFAULT SETTINGS..................................3.30
Default settings ......................................... A1.22
Defines the type of a selected radio
configuration ................................................3.59
DELETE ADDRESS 3.77
DELETE PAGE 3.66
DELETE RANGE 3.66
Deletes from page xxx to page yyy..............3.66
Deletes specified page.................................3.66
Design............................................................1.4
Design of Display ...........................................2.9
DETAILS... ...........................................3.33, 4.5
DEV..............................................................3.32
DEVICE MAPPING ......................................3.59
DEVICE MAPPING... ..................................3.59
Digital data terminal .......................................3.5
DISCONNECT .............................................2.30
DISP TIMER ................................................3.81
Display ...........................................................2.9
DISPLAY PARAMS... ..................................3.80
Displays a list of
"fixed" modules ......................................3.44
interface modules ..................................3.44
plug-in modules .....................................3.44
Download .................................................. A1.30
Dust protection filter .......................................5.1
EDIT PRESET PAGE FIX.FRQ ...................3.67
EDIT... ................................................3.42, 3.67
Editing and Storing a Loaded Page .............3.21
Editing of the tuning value for the
OCXO frequency ...................................3.45
TCXO frequency ....................................3.45
â I.2 â
Editing of the tuning value for the
VCXO frequency....................................3.45
Emergency clear..........................................2.17
EMERGENCY MODE ..................................2.43
ENA/DIS ......................................................3.62
Enables or disables the
PLAIN marker function.................................3.62
Enabling / disabling of squelch function.......2.36
ENT..............................................................2.14
Entry of a
ALC DECAY time...................................3.47
ALC level ...............................................3.48
CU maintenance PIN .............................3.27
logical address and IP address..............3.77
MAINT PIN number ...............................3.71
maintenance PIN ...................................3.30
radio maintenance PIN ..........................3.26
radio setup PIN ......................................3.26
setup PIN number..................................3.64
TX ALC ATTACK time ...........................3.47
Entry of value for
audio RX LEVEl .....................................3.48
audio TX LEVEL ....................................3.48
GUARD VOLUME..................................3.49
MARKER VOLUME ...............................3.49
SIDETONE VOLUME ............................3.49
EQUIP...................................................3.32, 4.4
Error...............................................................4.2
code ................................................4.9, 4.25
index ...............................................4.9, 4.25
list .................................................4.10, 4.26
ERRORS... ..........................................4.8, 4.24
ESC / CLR ...................................................2.14
ESC/CLR and Key 1 ....................................2.17
ESC/CLR and ON/OFF................................2.17
ET 4400 .........................................................1.4
EVEN ...........................................................3.35
Example of a network with router ................3.74
Explanation of models ...................................1.2
Explanation of softkey symbols ...................2.10
EXT REF......................................................3.46
External devices ............................................3.5
External interfaces ...................................... A1.2
front..................................................... A1.33
rear ..................................................... A1.35
rear modules....................................... A1.37
External supply connector X33 ................. A1.14
FD 221 ...................................................... A1.21
FD 430 ...................................................... A1.19
FD 4430 .........................................................1.4
FILL connector X5 ...................................... A1.2
Filter............................................... A1.19, A1.21
Filter / power amplifier 1 connector X27 ... A1.11
Filter / power amplifier 2 connector X28 ... A1.12
Filter mat........................................................5.1
FIX.FRQ.......................................................2.35
FIXED ..........................................................2.29
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
FM.......................................................2.36, 3.52
Format of responses ................................... A2.3
Frame for data traffic................................... A2.1
FREQ ..................................................2.36, 3.68
Frequency table .............................A2.10, A2.12
Front
cabling ..............................................2.5, 2.7
panel ........................................................1.6
view..........................................................1.1
FRONTPANEL AUDIO SOURCE ................3.61
Functioning ....................................................1.6
Functions related to the communication mode
(Rx, Rx/Tx, Tx).............................................2.45
FW ......................................................3.32, 3.72
G ..................................................................2.19
GATEWAY ADDR...............................3.38, 3.79
GB 4000C ......................................................1.4
GB2PP .........................................................3.34
General Data..................................................1.8
GET FROM RADIO......................................3.77
GF 4400T.......................................................1.4
GH 4450.........................................................1.4
GO ...............................................................2.19
GRx antenna connector X5032................. A1.15
GUARD ........................................................2.35
GUARD RECEIVER.....................................2.20
Guard Receiver.....................................1.4, 3.19
Guard Receiver ET 4400G ............................1.4
GUARD VOLUME........................................3.49
Headphone volume control ..........................2.18
Headset connector X7 ................................ A1.3
HIGH ............................................................2.36
HW ...............................................................3.32
HWM ............................................................3.32
HWMOD.......................................................3.32
IBIT ................................................................4.2
IBIT... ...................................................4.4, 4.19
ICAO ............................................................3.80
Ident. No. ...........................................3.33, 3.73
IETF .............................................................3.75
IN 4000A .......................................................1.3
INDICATORS...............................................3.80
Indicators .....................................................2.19
Initiates a(n)
control unit RESET ................................2.17
imergency Clear.....................................2.17
procedure for system PIN number input 2.17
INPUT ..........................................................3.51
Input of 6 digits............................................ A2.9
Input of 7 digits............................................ A2.9
6076.0822.12.02
Inquiry ......................................................... A2.3
Inquiry of
carrier and squelch ............................... A2.3
entire setting ......................................... A2.3
frequency or channel number ............... A2.3
INSTALL OPTION .......................................3.42
Installation......................................................2.2
Interface Module GH 4450.............................1.4
Internet engineering task force ....................3.75
Internet protocol..................................3.37, 3.75
Introduction to communication modes,
resources and external devices .....................3.2
Introduction to
displays and controls ...............................2.8
loaded, user and current pages .............3.21
Inventory structure .................................... A1.25
INVENTORY... ...................................3.32, 3.72
IP ........................................................3.37, 3.75
IP ADDR .............................................3.38, 3.79
IP address....................................................3.75
KEY..............................................................2.19
Key
ENT........................................................2.14
ESC / CLR .............................................2.14
LOCAL ...................................................2.14
MENU HOME ...............................2.14, 2.34
ON ................................................2.21, 2.24
ON / OFF ...............................................2.14
SELECT.................................................2.14
Key Combinations........................................2.17
KEY ILLUM ..................................................3.80
KEYBD TEST... ..........................................4.21
keys MENU HOME and ENT.......................3.26
Keys with Fixed Function.............................2.14
KR 4400.........................................................1.4
KY58BB .......................................................3.59
KY58DP .......................................................3.59
Label date of battery installation ....................5.1
LAN connector X20..................................... A1.5
LAN SERVICE connector X6 ...................... A1.3
LED
1 to 4......................................................2.20
AC/DC..................................2.20, 2.22, 2.25
BATT......................................................2.20
CARR.....................................................2.19
CU........................................2.19, 2.22, 2.25
G ............................................................2.19
GO .......................................2.19, 2.22, 2.25
KEY........................................................2.19
LOCAL ...................................................2.20
ON .......................................2.19, 2.22, 2.25
SQL G....................................................2.20
SQL M....................................................2.19
Level .....................................................4.9, 4.25
Link 11 ...........................................................3.3
â I.3 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
Link 11 (CLEW)............................................3.13
Link 11 data terminal......................................3.5
Loaded page area........................................3.21
LOADED PAGE PARAMETERS .................3.66
Loading the preset pages into the radio.... A1.31
LOCAL ................................................2.15, 3.57
LOG ADDR .........................................3.38, 3.79
Logical address............................................3.75
Loudspeaker volume control........................2.18
LOW.............................................................2.36
LOW DISTORTION......................................3.50
LOW NOISE.................................................3.50
M3SR .............................................................1.1
MAIN ............................................................2.34
MAINT PIN..........................................3.30, 3.71
Maintenance ..................................................5.1
Malfunction.....................................................4.1
Man-machine interface ..................................1.6
MANUAL FIX. FRQ......................................2.35
MANUAL... ..................................................2.35
MARK...........................................................3.35
MARKER......................................................2.36
MARKER CONTROL ...................................3.62
MARKER VOLUME .....................................3.49
MARKER... CONTROL ................................3.62
MEDIUM ......................................................2.36
Menu
0: SYSTEM ............................................3.26
010: RADIO CONNECTION ..................2.27
020: COMLINE SESSION .....................2.28
030: RADIO SESSION ..........................3.28
040: MAIN ..............................................2.34
110, Page 1: MANUAL FIX. FRQ ..........2.35
110, Page 2: MANUAL FIX. FRQ ..........2.37
210, Page 1: USER PRESET FIX.FRQ .2.39
210, Page 2: USER PRESET FIX.FRQ .2.42
300: EMERGENCY MODE ....................2.43
400, Page 1: RADIO MAINTENANCE ...3.29
400, Page 2: RADIO MAINTENANCE ...3.31
405: RADIO IBIT RESULTS ....................4.4
406: RADIO IBIT DETAILS ......................4.5
410: RADIO CBIT RESULTS...................4.6
411: RADIO CBIT DETAILS ....................4.7
415: RADIO INVENTORY .....................3.32
416: RADIO INVENTORY DETAILS......3.33
420: RADIO ERROR LIST .......................4.8
421: RADIO ERROR DETAILS ...............4.9
425: RADIO CONTROL PORT ..............3.34
435: RADIO ADDRESS LIST ................3.36
436: RADIO ADDRESS ROUTE............3.37
440: RADIO TIME and DATE ................3.40
505: RADIO OPTIONS ..........................3.41
506: SET OPTIONS...............................3.42
510: RADIO MODULES.........................3.43
511: PLATFORM PARAMETERS..........3.45
512, Page 1: AFI PARAMETERS ..........3.47
512, Page 2: AFI PARAMETERS ..........3.49
515: VU RX PARAMETERS ..................3.50
516: VU TX PARAMETERS ..................3.52
â I.4 â
Menu
517: VU SYN PARAMETERS................3.54
535: SPLIT SITE DEFINITION ..............3.55
550: PTT COMLINE MAPPING .............3.56
560: AUDIO MAPPING..........................3.58
565: DEVICE MAPPING........................3.59
570: SQUELCH POLARITY...................3.60
575: FRONTPANEL AUDIO SOURCE..3.61
580: MARKER CONTROL.....................3.62
600: RADIO SETUP ..............................3.63
610: PRESET CONFIGURATION .........3.65
620: LOADED PAGE PARAMETERS ...3.66
710 3.67, Page 1: EDIT PRESET PAGE
FIX.FRQ.................................................3.67
710, Page 2: EDIT PRESET PAGE
FIX.FRQ.................................................3.69
800: CU MAINTENANCE ......................3.71
805: CU IBIT RESULTS ........................4.19
806: CU IBIT DETAILS ..........................4.20
810: CU CBIT RESULTS.......................4.22
811: CU CBIT DETAILS ........................4.23
815: CU INVENTORY............................3.72
816: CU INVENTORY DETAILS............3.73
820: CU ERROR LIST ...........................4.24
821: CU ERROR DETAILS....................4.25
835: RADIO ADDRESS LIST ................3.74
836: CU ADDRESS ROUTE..................3.78
840: CU DISPLAY PARAMS .................3.80
MENU HOME .....................................2.14, 2.34
MENU HOME and ENT ...............................2.17
Menu overview.............................................2.47
Miscellaneous 1 connector X23.................. A1.7
Miscellaneous 2 connector X21.................. A1.5
MMI................................................................1.6
MODE .................................................2.35, 3.67
MODU.................................................2.36, 3.67
MONITOR....................................................2.29
Multiband, Multimode And Multirole
Surface Radio ................................................1.1
Name of module or software...............3.33, 3.73
Network with router......................................3.74
NONE ..........................................................3.34
NORMAL .....................................................3.80
Numerical keypad ........................................2.14
Numerical values .........................................2.12
OCXO ..........................................................3.45
ODD.............................................................3.35
OFF..............................................................2.35
ON ...............................................................2.19
ON / OFF .....................................................2.14
Operation .......................................................2.8
Option code ...................................................3.2
OPTIONS... .................................................3.41
Overview........................................................3.2
Own address ...................................3.78
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
PA ................................................................3.53
PA UHF........................................................3.53
PA VHF ........................................................3.53
PAGE ...........................................................2.41
PAGE 1/2 MORE... ............................2.37, 3.31
PAGE DEF... ...............................................3.66
PARAMS... ..................................................3.43
PARITY ........................................................3.35
PBIT ...............................................................4.2
Peripheral equipment................................ A1.16
PIN CU MAINT.............................................3.27
PIN number..................................................3.24
PIN RADIO MAINT ......................................3.26
PIN RADIO SETUP......................................3.26
PLATFORM PARAMETERS........................3.45
POW LEV.....................................................3.52
POWER ..............................................2.36, 3.67
Power amplifier ......................................... A1.16
Power Supply IN 4000A.................................1.3
Power-on BIT .................................................4.2
PRESET.......................................................3.65
PRESET CONFIGURATION .......................3.65
PRESET DEF... ..........................................3.65
Preset Page .................................................3.20
PRESET... ...................................................2.39
Produces test tone (1 kHz) ..........................2.36
Production Date ..................................3.33, 3.73
PROTOCOL.................................................3.34
PTT COMLINE MAPPING ...........................3.56
PTT MAPPING... .........................................3.56
PWR SUP ....................................................3.46
Radio addr ...................................................2.27
RADIO ADDRESS LIST......................3.36, 3.74
RADIO ADDRESS ROUTE..........................3.37
RADIO BASIS ................................................1.4
Radio basis ....................................................1.4
RADIO CBIT DETAILS ..................................4.7
RADIO CBIT RESULTS.................................4.6
RADIO CONNECTION ................................2.27
RADIO CONTROL PORT ............................3.34
Radio data bus...............................................1.6
RADIO ERROR DETAILS..............................4.9
RADIO ERROR LIST .....................................4.8
RADIO IBIT DETAILS ....................................4.5
RADIO IBIT RESULTS ..................................4.4
RADIO INVENTORY....................................3.32
RADIO INVENTORY DETAILS....................3.33
RADIO MAINT... ..................................3.29, 4.3
RADIO MAINTENANCE .......................3.29, 4.3
Radio maintenance PIN ...............................3.24
Radio mode....................................................3.2
Radio module bus ..........................................1.6
6076.0822.12.02
RADIO MODULES.......................................3.43
RADIO OPTIONS ........................................3.41
Radio platform ...............................................1.6
RADIO SESSION ........................................3.28
Radio session PIN .......................................3.24
RADIO SETUP ............................................3.63
Radio setup PIN...........................................3.24
RADIO SYSTEM PIN...................................3.26
RADIO TIME and DATE ..............................3.40
RADIO TIME... ............................................3.40
RADIO... MODULES....................................3.43
RDB ...............................................................1.6
Reading the current time and date from
the connected radio .....................................3.40
Readjust the oscillators..................................5.1
Rear cabling............................................2.4, 2.6
Receive mode................................................1.6
REF IN IMP..................................................3.46
REF OUT .....................................................3.46
Reference frequency input connector X10 . A1.4
Reference frequency output connector X11 A1.4
Relationship between option codes, radio
modes, external devices, resources and
communication modes...................................3.2
REMOTE .....................................................3.56
Remote control ................................ A1.27, A2.1
Remote control via RS485 connector X24 and
GB2PP protocol .................................. A1.28
S400U protocol ................................... A1.29
Remote-control codes................................. A2.5
Repeat counter .....................................4.9, 4.25
Required personnel .......................................1.3
Required power supply ..................................1.3
RESET.........................................................2.14
Resets all maintenance parameters of
transceiver to default settings ......................3.30
Resources......................................................3.4
RESTORE PAGE ........................................2.41
RESTORE PRESET ....................................3.65
Restores the preset configuration stored in
the radio.......................................................3.65
Restoring a specific user page ....................3.22
Restoring all user pages ..............................3.22
Retouching the paint work .............................5.2
Retrieves an address list from the
assigned radio .............................................3.77
RFC page ...........................................3.37, 3.75
RMB...............................................................1.6
ROUTE... ...........................................3.38, 3.78
Router ..........................................................3.74
RS 232........................................................ A1.8
RS 232 connector X22................................ A1.6
RS 485 / RS 422......................................... A1.8
RS 485 connector X24................................ A1.8
RS TYPE .....................................................3.35
Rules for remote frequency control............. A2.9
â I.5 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
Rx antenna connector X5031 ................... A1.15
RX LEVEL....................................................3.48
S400U ..........................................................3.34
S400U protocol ........................................... A2.1
Safety rules ....................................................1.9
SAVE AS......................................................3.68
SAVE PAGE ................................................2.41
SAVE TO CTRL UNIT..................................3.77
SAVE TO RADIO .........................................3.39
Saves address list to the control unit ..3.77, 3.79
Saves the edited PRESET PAGE under
a new PRESET number...............................3.68
Scanning ..................................................... A2.4
Scheduled maintenance ................................5.1
SELECT .......................................................2.15
SELECT and 10 x LOCAL within 10 sec......2.17
Select by turning the tuning knob.................2.12
Selection of
access level ...........................................2.30
active PTT line 3.56, 3.57
AF AGC attack time ...............................3.50
AF AGC decay time ...............................3.50
antenna input .........................................3.51
channel spacing .....................................3.69
channel spacing value ...........................2.38
clipper level ............................................3.51
clock frequency for reference
output X11 .............................................3.46
clock source ...........................................3.46
communication line for PTT mapping ....3.56
configuration of the power level for
the external power amplifier...................3.53
date format.............................................3.80
edit fields for power levels .....................3.52
equipment for CBIT..................................4.6
equipment for error list .............................4.8
equipment for radio inventory ................3.32
frequency mode .....................................3.80
guard receiver AF signal ........................2.35
interface for level setting ........................3.47
modulation type ............................2.36, 3.67
parity ......................................................3.35
pre-defined communication mode 2.37, 3.69
protocol type ..........................................3.34
PTT level of the current line ...................3.57
radio operating mode .............................2.35
sensitivity ...............................................3.50
serial port standard ................................3.35
section of the Preset Page to be
edited or viewed.....................................3.67
transmit power ..............................2.36, 3.67
Tx offset value ..............................2.38, 3.70
Selection within a set of values....................2.12
Selects the
entire radio or comline for IBIT ................4.4
input to be monitored .............................3.46
radio operation mode .............................3.68
SENSITIV LW NOISE ..................................3.50
Serial No. ...........................................3.33, 3.73
Server ............................................................1.6
â I.6 â
Service / FILL connector X4 ....................... A1.2
Service and Maintenance Tool ZS 4400... A1.31
SESSION.....................................................2.30
SET OPTIONS.............................................3.42
Sets the default IP .......................................2.17
Setting of a
AM modulation depth.............................3.52
AM transmit power.................................3.52
common frequency for Tx and
Rx operation ..........................................2.36
display brightness ..................................3.81
display contrast......................................3.81
display timer...........................................3.81
FM transmit power .................................3.52
front key illumination ..............................3.80
LED brightness ......................................3.80
logical radio address..............................2.27
new date ................................................3.40
new time ................................................3.40
number of bits in the telegram ...............3.35
number of stop bits ................................3.35
response threshold of the S/N squelch..3.51
value for fine tuning of synthesizer
FM modulator.........................................3.54
value for FM Deviation Narrowband ......3.54
value for FM Deviation Wideband
(analog)..................................................3.54
value for TX Deviation for
Link 11 operation ...................................3.54
SETUP.........................................................3.64
SETUP... .....................................................3.64
SIDETN VOLUME .......................................3.49
Softkey.........................................................2.10
ACTIVE..................................................3.57
ADD ADDR ............................................3.77
ADDRESS LIST... ........................3.36, 3.77
AF AGC .................................................2.38
ALC DECAY ..........................................3.47
AM .........................................................3.52
AM MOD ................................................3.52
ATTACK.................................................3.50
AUDIO FRONTP... ................................3.61
AUDIO MAPPING... ..............................3.58
BAND.....................................................2.43
BITRATE................................................3.35
BITS/CHAR............................................3.35
BRIGHT .................................................3.81
CBIT... ............................................4.6, 4.22
CHAN SP......................................2.38, 3.69
CHANGE TYPE .....................................3.77
CL ..........................................................3.44
CLEAR LIST ...................................4.8, 4.24
CLIP LEV ...............................................3.51
CLIPPER ...............................................2.37
CLK SRC ...............................................3.46
CODEC..................................................3.47
COMM ..........................................2.37, 3.69
CONNECT ....................................2.30, 3.53
CONTR ..................................................3.81
CONTROL PORT... ..............................3.34
COUNT ..................................................3.65
CU... MAINT .................................3.71, 4.18
DATE ............................................3.40, 3.80
DECAY ..................................................3.50
DEFAULT MODE...................................3.68
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
softkey
DEFAULT SETTINGS ...........................3.30
DELETE ADDRESS ..............................3.77
DELETE PAGE ......................................3.66
DELETE RANGE ...................................3.66
DETAILS... .....................................3.33, 4.5
DEVICE MAPPING... ............................3.59
DISCONNECT .......................................2.30
DISP TIMER ..........................................3.81
DISPLAY PARAMS... ...........................3.80
EDIT... ..........................................3.42, 3.67
ENA/DIS ................................................3.62
EQUIP.............................................3.32, 4.4
ERRORS... ....................................4.8, 4.24
EXT REF................................................3.46
FM..........................................................3.52
FREQ ............................................2.36, 3.68
GATEWAY ADDR.........................3.38, 3.79
GET FROM RADIO ...............................3.77
GUARD ..................................................2.35
GUARD VOLUME..................................3.49
IBIT... .............................................4.4, 4.19
INDICATORS.........................................3.80
INPUT ....................................................3.51
INSTALL OPTION .................................3.42
INVENTORY... .............................3.32, 3.72
IP ADDR .......................................3.38, 3.79
KEY ILLUM ............................................3.80
KEYBD TEST... ....................................4.21
LOCAL ...................................................3.57
LOG ADDR ...................................3.38, 3.79
MAINT PIN....................................3.30, 3.71
MANUAL... ............................................2.35
MARKER ...............................................2.36
MARKER VOLUME ...............................3.49
MARKER... CONTROL ..........................3.62
MODE ...........................................2.35, 3.67
MODU ...........................................2.36, 3.67
OCXO .....................................................3.45
OPTIONS... 3.41
PA...........................................................3.53
PA UHF ..................................................3.53
PA VHF...................................................3.53
PAGE......................................................2.41
PAGE 1/2 MORE... .......................2.37, 3.31
PAGE DEF... .........................................3.66
PARAMS... ............................................3.43
PARITY...................................................3.35
PIN CU MAINT .......................................3.27
PIN RADIO MAINT .................................3.26
PIN RADIO SETUP ................................3.26
POW LEV ...............................................3.52
POWER .........................................2.36, 3.67
PRESET .................................................3.65
PRESET DEF... .....................................3.65
PRESET... .............................................2.39
PROTOCOL ...........................................3.34
PWR SUP...............................................3.46
RADIO MAINT... ............................3.29, 4.3
RADIO SESSION ..................................3.28
RADIO TIME... ......................................3.40
RADIO... MODULES..............................3.43
REF IN IMP............................................3.46
REF OUT ...............................................3.46
REMOTE ...............................................3.56
RESTORE PAGE ..................................2.41
6076.0822.12.02
RESTORE PRESET ..............................3.65
ROUTE... .....................................3.38, 3.78
RS TYPE ...............................................3.35
RX LEVEL..............................................3.48
SAVE AS ...............................................3.68
SAVE PAGE ..........................................2.41
SAVE TO CTRL UNIT ...........................3.77
SAVE TO RADIO...................................3.39
SENSITIV LW NOISE............................3.50
SESSION...............................................2.30
SET OPTIONS.......................................3.42
SETUP...................................................3.64
SETUP... ...............................................3.64
SIDETN VOLUME .................................3.49
SOURCE ...............................................3.58
SPLIT SITE... ........................................3.55
SQUELCH .............................................2.36
SQUELCH LEV S/N...............................3.51
SQUELCH... POLARITY........................3.60
START ............................................4.4, 4.19
STOP ..............................................4.4, 4.19
STOP BITS ............................................3.35
SUBNET MASK ............................3.38, 3.79
TCXO.....................................................3.45
TIME ......................................................3.40
TIME READ ...........................................3.40
TONE.....................................................2.36
TX ALC .........................................3.47, 3.48
TX ALC LEVEL ......................................3.48
TX DEV FM LK11 ..................................3.54
TX DEV FM NB......................................3.54
TX DEV FM WB.....................................3.54
TX DEV TRIM ........................................3.54
TX LEVEL ..............................................3.48
TX OFFS.......................................2.38, 3.70
TYPE .....................................................3.59
VCXO.....................................................3.45
VIEW FIXED ..........................................3.44
VIEW IF SLOT .......................................3.44
VIEW MOD SLOT..................................3.44
PROTOCOL...........................................3.34
Softkey number............................................2.10
Softkey symbols...........................................2.10
Software Download................................... A1.30
SOURCE .....................................................3.58
SPACE.........................................................3.35
SPLIT SITE DEFINITION ............................3.55
SPLIT SITE... ..............................................3.55
SQL G..........................................................2.19
SQL M..........................................................2.19
SQUELCH ...................................................2.36
SQUELCH LEV S/N.....................................3.51
SQUELCH POLARITY.................................3.60
SQUELCH... POLARITY..............................3.60
Standby switchover........................................1.3
START ...........................................................4.4
Starts IBIT for the selected configuration.......4.4
STOP .............................................................4.4
STOP BITS ..................................................3.35
SUBNET MASK ..................................3.38, 3.79
SW ......................................................3.32, 3.72
â I.7 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
Switches
AF AGC function on or off......................2.38
automatic level control (ALC) for
transmitter on or off................................3.48
between two active Presets ...................3.65
between two preset counts ....................3.65
clipper function on or off ........................2.37
input impedance of interface X10 ..........3.46
marker tone on or off .............................2.36
monitoring function on or off ..................3.46
over between radio and controller .........3.77
Switching Off.......................................2.23, 2.26
Switching On.......................................2.21, 2.24
Switching the Transceiver On and Off .........2.21
SWM ............................................................3.32
SWMOD.......................................................3.32
Synchron Data Mode .....................................3.3
SYSTEM ......................................................3.26
System PIN ..................................................3.24
Taking care ....................................................5.2
TCXO ...........................................................3.45
Technical data........................................... A1.26
Technical information.................................. A1.1
Telescopic slide .............................................2.2
Test messages............................................ A2.4
TIME ............................................................3.40
TIME READ .................................................3.40
Toggle switches ...........................................2.13
TONE ...........................................................2.36
Top view.........................................................1.5
Transmit operation .........................................1.6
Transmitter Unit VT 4403...............................1.4
Troubleshooting .............................................4.2
Tuning knob .................................................2.18
TX ALC ........................................................3.47
TX ALC LEVEL ............................................3.48
TX DEV FM LK11 ........................................3.54
TX DEV FM NB............................................3.54
TX DEV FM WB ...........................................3.54
TX DEV TRIM ..............................................3.54
TX LEVEL ....................................................3.48
TX OFFS.............................................2.38, 3.70
Tx offset value..............................................2.38
TYPE............................................................3.59
Type .............................................................3.33
UHF..............................................................2.35
UHF Agile Filter FD 430............................ A1.19
UHF Automatic Filter FD 221.................... A1.21
UHF filter........................................................1.4
UHF Filter FD 4430........................................1.4
UHF Power Amplifier VD 480L ................. A1.16
UHF+VHF ....................................................2.35
Unpacking ......................................................2.1
â I.8 â
Update 32 Tool ......................................... A1.31
Upper left softkey and ON/OFF and
upper right softkey and ENT ........................2.17
Use under normal conditions .........................2.1
Use under special conditions.........................3.1
User page area ............................................3.22
User PIN ......................................................3.24
USER PRESET FIX.FRQ ............................2.39
V.24 remote control .................................... A2.1
V/D CP...........................................................3.3
V/D UNCP......................................................3.3
Value selection ............................................2.12
Variant ................................................3.33, 3.73
VCXO...........................................................3.45
VD 480L.................................................... A1.16
Version No. ........................................3.33, 3.73
VHF..............................................................2.35
VHF/UHF Receiver ET 4400 (main receiver) 1.4
VHF/UHF Synthesizer GF 4400T ..................1.4
VIEW FIXED ................................................3.44
VIEW IF SLOT .............................................3.44
VIEW MOD SLOT........................................3.44
Visual inspection............................................4.1
Voice / data ciphered .....................................3.3
Voice / data unciphered .................................3.3
VT 4403 .........................................................1.4
VU RX PARAMETERS ................................3.50
VU SYN PARAMETERS..............................3.54
VU TX PARAMETERS ................................3.52
Warning .........................................................4.2
WB ANALOG .................................................3.3
WB DIGITAL BB ............................................3.3
WB DIGTAL DP .............................................3.3
Wideband Analog ..........................................3.3
Wideband Digital..........................................3.11
Wideband Digital Baseband ..........................3.3
Wideband Digital Diphase .............................3.3
X10 ............................................................. A1.4
X11 ............................................................. A1.4
X20 ............................................................. A1.5
X21 ............................................................. A1.5
X22 ............................................................. A1.6
X23 ............................................................. A1.7
X24 ............................................................. A1.8
X25 ............................................................. A1.9
X26 ........................................................... A1.10
X27 ........................................................... A1.11
X28 ........................................................... A1.12
X30 ........................................................... A1.13
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
X31............................................................ A1.13
X32............................................................ A1.14
X33............................................................ A1.14
X4................................................................ A1.2
X5................................................................ A1.2
X5031........................................................ A1.15
X5032........................................................ A1.15
X6................................................................ A1.3
X7................................................................ A1.3
ZS 4400 .................................................... A1.31
6076.0822.12.02
â I.9 / I.10 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Overview
29(59,(:
Chapter
8VHU,QIRUPDWLRQ
General Features, Explanation of Models, Required Personnel, Required Power
Supply, Design, Functioning, General Data, Detailed Saftey Rules, Accessories
8VHXQGHU1RUPDO&RQGLWLRQV
Introduction, Unpacking and Checking, Installation into a 19" Rack, Basic Cabling,
Operation
8VHXQGHU6SHFLDO&RQGLWLRQV
0DOIXQFWLRQ
$SS
Introduction to Communication Modes, Resources and External Devices, Configuration Examples, Guard Receiver, Preset Pages, PIN Numbers, Configuration
Introduction, Visual Inspection, Troubleshooting
0DLQWHQDQFH
Scheduled Maintenance, Taking Care
7HFKQLFDO,QIRUPDWLRQ
External Interfaces, Connection of Peripheral Equipment, Default Settings, Inventory Structure, Technical Data, Remote Control, Download
$SS
95HPRWH&RQWURO 683URWRFRO
General, Frame for Data Traffic, Address, Acknowledgement, Addressing, Inquiry,
Scanning, Test Messages, Remote Control Codes, Rules for Remote Frequency
Control of Series M3SR
$SS
/$195HPRWH&RQWURO *%333URWRFRO
General, List of Commands
6076.0822.12.01
â3/4â
065 75$16&(,9(56 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
List of Contents
Chapter
Title
Page
8VHU ,QIRUPDWLRQ
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
General Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Explanation of Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Required Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Required Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Design, e.g. XT 4410A - Mod. 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Functioning, e.g. XT 4410A - Mod. 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Detailed Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
8VH XQGHU 1RUPDO &RQGLWLRQV
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.5.9
2.5.10
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Unpacking and Checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Installation into a 19" Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Basic Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
⢠M3SR Transceiver, e.g. XT 4410A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
⢠M3SR Transceiver, e.g. XT 4460A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
⢠Introduction to Displays and Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
⢠Switching the Transceiver On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
⢠Menu 010: RADIO CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
⢠Menu 020: COMLINE SESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
⢠Menu 040: MAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34
⢠Menu 110, Page 1: MANUAL FIX. FRQ (Fixed Frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
⢠Menu 110, Page 2: MANUAL FIX. FRQ (Fixed Frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
⢠Menu 210, Page 1: USER PRESET FIX.FRQ (Fixed Frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
⢠Menu 210, Page 2: USER PRESET FIX.FRQ (Fixed Frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42
⢠Menu 300: EMERGENCY MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43
8VH XQGHU 6SHFLDO &RQGLWLRQV
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.4
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.6
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Introduction to Communication Modes, Resources and External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
⢠Communication Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
⢠Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
⢠External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
⢠Voice / Data Unciphered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
⢠Wideband Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
⢠Wideband Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
⢠Link 11 (CLEW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
⢠Voice Data Ciphered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Guard Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Preset Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
⢠General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
⢠Introduction to Loaded, User and Current Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
PIN Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
⢠Menu 0: SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
⢠Menu 030: RADIO SESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
⢠Menu 400, Page 1: RADIO MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
⢠Menu 400, Page 2: RADIO MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31
6076.0822.12.02
â 0.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(56 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
Chapter
Title
3.7.5
3.7.6
3.7.7
3.7.8
3.7.9
3.7.10
3.7.11
3.7.12
3.7.13
3.7.14
3.7.15
3.7.16
3.7.17
3.7.18
3.7.19
3.7.20
3.7.21
3.7.22
3.7.23
3.7.24
3.7.25
3.7.26
3.7.27
3.7.28
3.7.29
3.7.30
3.7.31
3.7.32
3.7.33
3.7.34
3.7.35
3.7.36
3.7.37
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
Page
Menu 415: RADIO INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Menu 416: RADIO INVENTORY DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
Menu 425: RADIO CONTROL PORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Menu 435: RADIO ADDRESS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Menu 436: RADIO ADDRESS ROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Menu 440: RADIO TIME and DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Menu 505: RADIO OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41
Menu 506: SET OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Menu 510: RADIO MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
Menu 511: PLATFORM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45
Menu 512, Page 1: AFI PARAMETERS (Audio Frequency Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47
Menu 512, Page 2: AFI PARAMETERS (Audio Frequency Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Menu 515: VU RX PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Menu 516: VU TX PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Menu 517: VU SYN PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54
Menu 535: SPLIT SITE DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55
Menu 550: PTT COMLINE MAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
Menu 560: AUDIO MAPPING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58
Menu 565: DEVICE MAPPING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59
Menu 570: SQUELCH POLARITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
Menu 575: FRONTPANEL AUDIO SOURCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61
Menu 580: MARKER CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
Menu 600: RADIO SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63
Menu 610: PRESET CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.65
Menu 620: LOADED PAGE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66
Menu 710, Page 1: EDIT PRESET PAGE FIX.FRQ (Fixed Frequency) . . . . . . . . . 3.67
Menu 710, Page 2: EDIT PRESET PAGE FIX.FRQ (Fixed Frequency) . . . . . . . . . 3.69
Menu 800: CU MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.71
Menu 815: CU INVENTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72
Menu 816: CU INVENTORY DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73
Menu 835: RADIO ADDRESS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74
Menu 836: CU ADDRESS ROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78
Menu 840: CU DISPLAY PARAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.80
0DOIXQFWLRQ
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
⢠BIT Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
⢠BIT Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
⢠BIT Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
0DLQWHQDQFH
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Taking Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
⢠Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
⢠Retouching the Paint Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
$
7HFKQLFDO ,QIRUPDWLRQ $
A1.1
A1.1.1
A1.1.2
A1.1.3
A1.1.4
A1.1.5
External Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.2
⢠Service / FILL Connector X4 (only X. 4410A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1.2
⢠FILL Connector X5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.2
⢠LAN SERVICE Connector X6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.3
⢠Headset Connector X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.3
⢠Reference Frequency Input Connector X10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.4
â 0.2 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(56 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
Chapter
Title
Page
A1.1.6
⢠Reference Frequency Output Connector X11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.4
A1.1.7
⢠LAN Connector X20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.5
A1.1.8
⢠Miscellaneous 2 Connector X21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.5
A1.1.9
⢠RS 232 Connector X22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.6
A1.1.10
⢠Miscellaneous 1 Connector X23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.7
A1.1.11
⢠RS 485 Connector X24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.8
A1.1.12
⢠AF Interface 2 Connector X25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.9
A1.1.13
⢠AF Interface 1 Connector X26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.10
A1.1.14
⢠Filter / Power Amplifier 1 Connector X27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1.11
A1.1.15
⢠Filter / Power Amplifier 2 Connector X28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.12
A1.1.16
⢠Antenna Connector X30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.13
A1.1.17
⢠DC IN Connector X31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.13
A1.1.18
⢠Battery Connector X32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.14
A1.1.19
⢠External Supply Connector X33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.14
A1.1.20
⢠Rx Antenna Connector X5031 (Part of Antenna Interface GI 4403). . . . . . . . . . . .A1.15
A1.1.21
⢠GRx Antenna Connector X5032 (Part of Antenna Interface GI 4403, Mod. 04). . .A1.15
A1.2
Connection of Peripheral Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.16
A1.2.1
⢠UHF Power Amplifier VD 480L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.16
A1.2.2
⢠UHF Agile Filter FD 430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.19
A1.2.3
⢠UHF Automatic Filter FD 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.21
A1.3
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.22
A1.4
Inventory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.25
A1.5
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1.26
A1.6
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.27
A1.6.1
⢠Remote Control via RS422 Connector X24 and GB2PP Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.28
A1.6.2
⢠Remote Control via RS485 Connector X24 and S400U Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.29
A1.7
Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.30
Data Sheet for Digital Programmable Software Radios of Series M3SR. . . . . . . . . . . PD 0757.6691.22
$
95HPRWH&RQWURO 683URWRFRO $
A2.1
A2.2
A2.3
A2.4
A2.5
A2.5.1
A2.5.2
A2.6
A2.6.1
A2.6.2
A2.6.3
A2.6.4
A2.7
A2.8
A2.8.1
A2.8.2
A2.9
A2.10
A2.11
A2.11.1
A2.11.2
A2.11.3
A2.11.4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.1
Frame for Data Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.1
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.1
Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.1
Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2.2
⢠Addressing Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.2
⢠Characteristics of Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.2
Inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.3
⢠Format of Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.3
⢠Inquiry of Carrier and Squelch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.3
⢠Inquiry of Frequency or Channel Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.3
⢠Inquiry of Entire Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.3
Scanning (S400U only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.4
Test Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.4
⢠Connectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.4
⢠Change Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.4
Remote-control Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.5
Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.8
Rules for Remote Frequency Control of Series M3SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.9
⢠Input of 6 Digits: (25 / 12.5-kHz Spacing without Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.9
⢠Input of 7 Digits: (25 / 12.5-kHz Spacing with Offset or 8.33-kHz Spacing) . . . . . . .A2.9
⢠Frequency Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.10
⢠ICAO Frequency Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2.12
6076.0822.12.02
â 0.3 â
065 75$16&(,9(56 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual
Chapter
Title
Page
$
/$195HPRWH&RQWURO *%333URWRFRO $
A3.1
A3.2
A3.2.1
A3.2.2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3.1
List of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3.1
⢠Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3.1
⢠Secondary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3.2
List of Figures
Fig.
Title
Page
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
M3SR Transceiver X. 4410A / X. 4460A, Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Power Supply IN 4000A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Top View of e.g. XT 4410A, Mod. 22 (without Cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Block Diagram of e.g. XT 4410A, Mod. 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
2.1
Design of Display (Principle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
2.2
Functions Related to the Communication Mode (Rx, Rx/Tx, Tx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
2.3
M3SR Transceiver X. 4410A / X. 4460A, Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47
2.4
M3SR Transceiver X. 4410A, Control and Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Outline Dimensions Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6102.4002.01DF
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Editing and Storing a Loaded Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Restoring a Specific User Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Restoring All User Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Activating a Specific User Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Editing and Saving a Current Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Example of a Network with Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.74
Application Examples, e.g. XT 4410A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.83
A1.1
A1.2
A1.3
External Interfaces of X. 4410A (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.33
External Interfaces (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.35
External Interfaces (Rear Modules). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1.37
â 0.4 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
8VHU ,QIRUPDWLRQ
This manual deals with the following M3SR Transceivers:
VHF Transceivers XU 4410A and XU 4460A
UHF Transceivers XD 4410A and XD 4460A
VHF / UHF Transceivers XT 4410A and XT 4460A
The only difference between the four transceivers is the frequency range (X. means XD = UHF,
XT = VHF/UHF, XU = VHF) and that M3SR Transceiver X. 4410A has a Control Unit
GB 4000C, mod. 02 installed at the front instead of the dummy panel of X. 4460A. Therefore,
here reference is made mostly to the "Transceiver" in general, differences being pointed out,
where necessary.
*HQHUDO)HDWXUHV
M3SR (= Multiband, Multimode and Multirole Surface Radio) is a completely new, economic,
highly flexible and future-oriented radio generation for military or non-military applications. It is
designed as an advanced, reliable and dynamic communications platform to meet the joint tactical radio objectives, and meet the interoperability requirements for stationary, mobile, shipboard and even special airborne communications scenarios.
The high-performance digital M3SR Transceiver can be used for transmission and reception in
the VHF and / or UHF band (in the range from 100 to 512 MHz).
The radios are capable of transmitting and/or receiving analog voice, digital voice and data in
all commonly used classes of emission, i.e. AM and FM in either narrowband or wideband configurations.
M3SR Transceivers X. 4410A and X. 4460A operate in fixed frequency mode.
; $
; $
)LJ 0657UDQVFHLYHU; $; $)URQW9LHZ
6076.0822.12.01
â 1.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
General benefits of the M3SR Transceiver are:
2SHQV\VWHPVDUFKLWHFWXUH to customize for individual initial or future needs.
+LJKPRGXODULW\ VOLFHGUDGLR with a variety of internal modules and rear interfaces
to meet the customerâs operational and system requirements.
9HUVDWLOHPDQPDFKLQHLQWHUIDFHdue to various local control panels and remote control
units.
6LPSOH GDWD KDQGOLQJ LQ QHWZRUNV due to compatibility with standard bus systems
(RS 485, LAN).
+LJK UHOLDELOLW\ (MTBF), VKRUW 0775 and efficient testability together with optimum
maintainability.
'LJLWDOVRIWZDUHSURJUDPPLQJof multiband, multifunction and multimode technology
platform for advanced data waveforms, allowing flexible use and fast upgrading.
([SODQDWLRQRI0RGHOV
Each of the transceiver types is available in different models, which are distinguished as follows. "xx" in the identification number stands for the model designator.
XT 4410A (ident. no. 6102.0307.xx):
Option
LINK 11 (CLEW) SW package
Guard Receiver ET 4400G
UHF Filter FD 4430
03
13
Model
22 31
41
42
XT 4460A (ident. no. 6102.1103.xx)
Option
OCXO
LINK 11 (CLEW) SW package
Guard Receiver ET 4400G
02
Model
03 13 31
41
XD 4410A (ident. no. 6122.1109.xx)
Option
LINK 11 (CLEW) SW package
Guard Receiver ET 4400G
Antenna Interface GI 4403, mod. 02
â 1.2 â
03
Model
13 15
31
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
5HTXLUHG3HUVRQQHO
Configuration of the M3SR Transceiver will have to be done by qualified personnel. Installation
and operation of the transceiver should be assigned to adequately skilled personnel.
The personnel must be familiar with this Operatorâs Manual.
5HTXLUHG3RZHU6XSSO\
The M3SR Transceiver operates on a DC voltage of 28 VDC (19 to 31 VDC). This voltage is
provided by the external AC Power Supply IN 4000A (19" rackmount of 1 height unit) available
for the purpose. The connecting cable between transceiver and AC Power Supply IN 4000A is
available on demand.
The transceiver may also be powered by an external battery (22 to 31 VDC). An automatic
switchover facility integrated in the transceiver provides for automatic standby switchover in
case primary power fails.
)LJ 3RZHU6XSSO\,1 $
6076.0822.12.01
â 1.3 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
'HVLJQHJ;7 $0RG
(See Fig. 1.3)
The M3SR Transceiver is accommodated in a sturdy 19" case of 3 height units, its top being
formed by a detachable screwed-down metal cover. After removing this cover, the modules of
XT 4410A become visible, which are:
Radio Basis KR 4400, Mod. 04
It is formed by several items, namely the mechanical parts chassis and housing, which
accommodate the internal transceiver modules. Located in the left-hand part of the chassis is the radio platform, containing a number of interface connectors for interfacing with
the internal subassemblies and also with the outside. For internal signal transfer a Radio
Module Bus, consisting of Radio Control Bus and Radio Data Bus, is available. Another
part of the radio basis is the Front Panel Unit, located directly at the front on the right. It
contains various control and display elements such as LEDs and buttons, external connectors as well as a loudspeaker.
VHF/UHF Receiver ET 4400 (main receiver)
The receiver is a plug-in module located in one of the slots in the centre left-hand part of
the chassis. It is of compact design, both sides being EMC-protected by appropriate
shielding covers. Once plugged into the radio platform in its assigned slot, the receiver is
held in place by quick-release fasteners.
VHF/UHF Synthesizer GF 4400T
The synthesizer is a plug-in module located in one of the slots in the centre left-hand part
of the chassis. It is of compact design, both sides being EMC-protected by appropriate
shielding covers. Once plugged into the radio platform in its assigned slot, the synthesizer is held in place by quick-release fasteners.
Interface Module GH 4450
The interface module is a plug-in module in the left-hand rear part of the chassis. At its
top it carries several connectors for ribbon-cable connections towards the transmitter
unit. In addition, the plug-in module contains three interfaces for the rear modules.
Transmitter Unit VT 4403, Mod. 02
The transmitter unit is a power module located in the right-hand part of the chassis and
extending over its full depth. It is made up of the actual transmitter board at the top and
the DC power supply located underneath. Both subassemblies are shielded by EMC covers. Also part of the transmitter unit is a heat sink with two fans, which are accommodated
directly at the rear, also on the right-hand side.
Control Unit GB 4000C, Mod. 02
The control unit is located at the front on the left-hand side. It contains a display, control
and display elements such as LEDs, fixed-function keys and softkeys, a keypad and a
connector.
UHF Filter FD 4430
The UHF filter is a plug-in module located in the centre left-hand part of the chassis, next
to the control unit. Once plugged into the radio platform in its assigned slot, the UHF filter
is held in place by quick-release fasteners.
â 1.4 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
3RZHUPRGXOHV
+HDWVLQNZLWKWZRIDQV
(part of VT 4403, Mod. 02)
3OXJLQPRGXOHV
,QWHUIDFH0RGXOH
*+
5DGLR3ODWIRUP
(part of KR 4400)
9+)8+)
7UDQVPLWWHU
%RDUG
9+)8+)
6\QWKHVL]HU
*) 7
with
9+)8+)
5HFHLYHU
(7
'&3RZHU
6XSSO\
underneath
(both are part of
Transmitter Unit
VT 4403, Mod. 02)
8+))LOWHU
)'
)UDPH
(part of Radio Basis
KR 4400)
&RQWURO8QLW*%&
0RG
)URQW3DQHO8QLW
(part of KR 4400)
1RWH
5DGLRSODWIRUPFRQQHFWRUVVKRZQZLWKRXW
SURWHFWLYHFDSV
)LJ 7RS9LHZRIHJ;7 $0RG ZLWKRXW&RYHU
6076.0822.12.01
â 1.5 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
)XQFWLRQLQJHJ;7 $0RG
(See Fig. 1.4)
The Radio Platform contains the central processor (= server) of the M3SR Transceiver. Via
LAN/Ethernet, the server is connected to its clients. Clients may be an integrated Control Unit
GB 4000C (mod. 02) and/or further Control Units GB 4000C (mod. 03) connected via the LAN
connector X20 and a LAN hub, or customer-specific devices. The clients plus the software
package DS4400A form the MMI (= man-machine interface) of the M3SR Transceiver. Clients
are controlled by using the GB2PP protocol. The MMI guides the operator through menu-based
operating procedures and selectively visualizes all states on the display. Commands are entered by making use of the control elements and the keypad. Operation and indication of the
transceiverâs operating status are both menu-oriented, operator interaction is performed via the
display and keyboard. The modules are controlled by the central processor via the Radio Module Bus (RMB). The Radio Platform stores all parameters relating to the individual modules. A
system monitor monitors the temperatures and operating voltages. In a clock section all clock
signals needed by the radio platform are generated. The RMB connects the modules of
XT 4410A to one another and also to the central processor and the I/O interfaces. Serial interfaces are used for data transmission and remote control purposes. Parallel interfaces serve as
discrete inputs and outputs and control for instance an externally connected filter and / or amplifier. An Audio Frequency Interface (AFI) processes the analog signals in digital form so that
they can be transmitted digitally on the Radio Data Bus (RDB).
The Front Panel connected at the Radio Platform carries the control and display elements for
handling the basic transceiver functions. An Ethernet port is available for sending and receiving
data for service purposes (configuration and software download).
When the transceiver operates in receive mode, the RF signal is taken from antenna connector
X30 to the VHF/UHF Transmitter Board. From here it is routed via a Tx/Rx switch to the UHF
Filter FD 4430. The input stages of the filter are directly protected for electrostatic discharge.
The filter is working for the VHF/UHF Receiver ET 4400 (main receiver) as a preselector to reduce the interfering levels from other radios of the platform. In the main receiver, the RF signal
passes along a VHF path (100 to 224.975 MHz) or a UHF path (225 to 512 MHz) to the mixer
stages. The mixer stages get the LO signal (365 to 652 MHz) from VHF/UHF Synthesizer
GF 4400T. The AGC-controlled 2nd IF signal with a frequency of 455 kHz is demodulated in the
digital section of the receiver. The demodulated baseband signal is taken to the RDB for further
processing.
In transmit operation, VHF/UHF Synthesizer GF 4400T generates a carrier frequency in the
range from 100 MHz to 512 MHz. For amplitude modulation, this carrier frequency is modulated by the VHF/UHF Transmitter Board. FM signals (both analog FM and digital FSK signals)
are generated by the synthesizer to be merely amplified by the VHF/UHF Transmitter Board
(signal RF_Drive). After amplification and filtering, the resulting signal is made available at antenna connector X30. The UHF Filter FD 4430 is working as postselector. The filter chain is
located within the transmit path of the radio. The selectivity of the filter chain reduces the transmitted noise energy of the radio which may degrade the sensitivity of other receiving radios on
the platform.
Interface Module GH 4450 connects the RMB and discrete signals between the Radio Platform, the VHF/UHF Transmitter Board and up to three further rear modules. Switchover between transmission and reception is effected via the RMB.
The integrated DC Power Supply uses the +28-VDC input voltage to generate all voltages required in XT 4410A.
â 1.6 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
$QWHQQD ;
7UDQVPLWWHU 8QLW
97
%$77(5< ;
9+)8+)
7UDQVPLWWHU
%RDUG
,QWHUIDFH
%RDUG
*+
5[B,Q
&21752/ ;
5)B'ULYH
7[B2XW
'&
3RZHU
6XSSO\
7[B,Q
'&B,1 ;
5[B2XW
8+)
)LOWHU
)'
5DGLR %DVLV
.5
&ORFN
6HFWLRQ
5()B287 ;
(WKHUQHW
0LVF
56
0LVF
56
$PS)LO
$PS)LO
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
$) ;
$) ;
Âľ&
6HUYHU
,2 ,QWHUIDFHV
6HULDO 3DUDOOHO
(WKHUQHW
$XGLR
)UHTXHQF\
,QWHUIDFH
9+)8+)
6\QWKHVL]HU
*) 7
/2B5[
5()B,1 ;
5[
5DGLR 3ODWIRUP
9+)8+)
5HFHLYHU
(7
50%
(WKHUQHW
)URQW 3DQHO
(WKHUQHW
&RQWURO 8QLW
*% &0RG
&OLHQW
'LVSOD\
.'' ; (WKHUQHW ; +HDGVHW ;
.H\ERDUG
.'' ;
)LJ %ORFN'LDJUDPRIHJ;7 $0RG
6076.0822.12.01
â 1.7 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
*HQHUDO'DWD
See data sheet for Digital Programmable Software Radios of Series M3SR in Appendix A1.
â 1.8 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
'HWDLOHG 6DIHW\ 5XOHV
Establish the cabling only if the transceiver is switched off.
When fitting operating rooms and installing and operating electrical equipment, the relevant national and international safety provisions and regulations have to be adhered to.
The following safety instructions apply in particular:
IEC 364
VDE 0100
DIN 57100
These safety regulations deal with the following subjects:
Ă
Protective measures:
 Prevention of accidents
 Overvoltage protection
 Insulation of equipment
 Grounding
Ă
Type and laying of lines and cables
Ă
Provisions for operational facilities, rooms and equipment requiring special handling
6076.0822.12.01
â 1.9 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠User Information
$FFHVVRULHV
$QWHQQDV
3RZHU6XSSO\
IN 4000A
&RQWURO8QLWV
HK 014
not shown:
HK 012
HK 001
GB 4000C, mod. 03
(remote version)
+DQGVHWVDQG+HDGVHWV
not shown:
GB 406.. on request
)LOWHUDQG$PSOLILHUV
GA 015
not shown:
GA 012
GA 013
GA 016H1
FD 430
not shown:
VU 210L
VU 220L
VD 480L
â 1.10 â
0DWLQJ&RQQHFWRU
not shown:
ZF 4410
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
8VH XQGHU 1RUPDO &RQGLWLRQV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This chapter provides information concerning
Unpacking and checking
Installation into a 19" rack
Basic cabling
Operation
- Introduction to Displays and Controls
- Switching the Transceiver On and Off
- Menu RADIO CONNECTION
- Menu COMLINE SESSION
- Menu MAIN
- Menu MANUAL FIX. FRQ
- Menu USER PRESET FIX.FRQ
- Menu EMERGENCY MODE
8QSDFNLQJDQG&KHFNLQJ
After delivery carry out the following steps:
1.
Unpack the transceiver.
2.
Check if delivery (transceiver and accessories) is complete by referring to the delivery
note.
3.
Check the transceiver and accessories for signs of damage which may have occurred
during transit.
4.
Contact the shipping agent immediately, if damage is found.
5.
Keep the packaging (box etc.) for later use, e.g. if the transceiver is to be sent to the nearest R&S representative for repair (see address list following the title page of this manual).
6076.0822.12.01
â 2.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
,QVWDOODWLRQLQWRD 5DFN
(See drawing 6102.4002.01DF at the end of this chapter)
0D[VFUHZLQ
GHSWKPP
)L[LQJ DWUDFN
IURQW
/RDGUDWLQJIRUHDFKVOLGHSDLU
1
6LGHOHQJWK
HJ; $
([WHQVLRQ
[3KLOOLSVVFUHZV
0[
,GHQWQR
[:DVKHU
,GHQWQR
,GHQWQR
1RWH
7KHWHOHVFRSLFVOLGHVDUHDYDLODEOHRQGHPDQG LGHQWQRRQO\IRUUDFNVSURYLG
LQJIRUDVHDWHGGHSWKRIPPDQGDFFHVVLEOHIURPWKHUHDURU IRUWUDLOLQJFD
EOHLQVWDOODWLRQ
â 2.2 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
For installation into a 19" rack with telescopic slides proceed as follows:
1.
Take the right-hand telescopic slide and extend it as far as it goes.
2.
Press the automatic unlocking device and pull the innermost slide completely out.
3.
Attach the innermost slide to the right-hand side panel of the transceiver by means of four
Phillips screws and the associated washers (see figure above).
4.
Take the left-hand telescopic slide and extend it as far as it goes.
5.
Press the automatic unlocking device and pull the innermost slide completely out.
6.
Attach the innermost slide to the left-hand side panel of the transceiver by means of four
Phillips screws and the associated washers (see figure above).
7.
Take the outer telescopic slides and mount them to the rack.
8.
Insert the transceiver, with its slides fitted, into the extended slides of the rack and slide
it in until the stop is reached.
9.
Fasten the transceiver to the rack using four screws.
10.
Cable the transceiver at its rear acc. to chapter 2.4.
6076.0822.12.01
â 2.3 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
%DVLF&DEOLQJ
&$87,21
&RQQHFWWKHPDLQVFDEOHRQO\DIWHUDOORWKHUFDEOLQJKDVEHHQPDGH
065 7UDQVFHLYHUHJ;7 $
5HDU&DEOLQJ
Cabling to be made at the rear:
X30 to Antenna
HJ;7 $
GND
X31 DC IN
X32 Battery
24 VDC (19 to 31 VDC)
,1$
GND
X2
X1 AC Mains
(85 to 265 VAC)
X31: DC IN is protected against reverse polarity (no function in this case).
1RWH
7KHFRQQHFWLQJFDEOHEHWZHHQFRQQHFWRU;'& ,1RI;7 $DQGFRQQHFWRU;RI$&
3RZHU6XSSO\,1 $LVDYDLODEOHRQGHPDQG RUGHUQXPEHU OHQJWK P
X32: Optional battery connection (+19 to +31 VDC,
case of power failure.
â 2.4 â
⤠25 A) for automatic switchover in the
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
)URQW&DEOLQJ
Cabling to be made at the front:
&RQQHFWRU
IRUIXWXUHXVH
)LOO*XQ&RQQHFWRU
6HUYLFH&RQQHFWRU
not used
used for connecting a PC
for
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
remote control
&RQQHFWRU IRU
+HDGVHW*$
used for LOCAL
mode operation
(voice)
software download
monitoring
analysis
1RWH
)RUGHWDLOHGLQIRUPDWLRQRQFRQQHFWRUVDQGFRQWDFWDVVLJQPHQW
VHHLQWHUIDFHGHVFULSWLRQLQ$SSHQGL[$7HFKQLFDO,QIRUPDWLRQ
6076.0822.12.01
â 2.5 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
065 7UDQVFHLYHUHJ;7 $
5HDU&DEOLQJ
Cabling to be made at the rear:
*%&0RG
X42 Battery
24 VDC (19 to 31 VDC)
X44 LAN
X30 to Antenna
GND
HJ;7 $
GND
X20 LAN
X33 Control
24 V (external,
switched)
X31 DC IN
X32 Battery
24 VDC (19 to 31 VDC)
,1$
GND
X2
X1 AC Mains
(85 to 265 VAC)
X31: DC IN is protected against reverse polarity (no function in this case).
1RWH
7KHFRQQHFWLQJFDEOHEHWZHHQFRQQHFWRU;'& ,1RI;7 $DQGFRQQHFWRU;RI$&
3RZHU6XSSO\,1 $LVDYDLODEOHRQGHPDQG RUGHUQXPEHU OHQJWK P
X32: Optional battery connection (+19 to +31 VDC,
case of power failure.
â 2.6 â
⤠25 A) for automatic switchover in the
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
)URQW&DEOLQJ
Cabling to be made at the front:
)LOO*XQ&RQQHFWRU
6HUYLFH&RQQHFWRU
not used
&RQQHFWRUIRU
+HDGVHW*$
used for connecting a PC
for
not used
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
remote control
software download
monitoring
analysis
1RWH
)RUGHWDLOHGLQIRUPDWLRQRQFRQQHFWRUVDQGFRQWDFWDVVLJQPHQW
VHHLQWHUIDFHGHVFULSWLRQLQ$SSHQGL[$7HFKQLFDO,QIRUPDWLRQ
6076.0822.12.01
â 2.7 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
2SHUDWLRQ
,QWURGXFWLRQWR'LVSOD\VDQG&RQWUROV
For transceiver control, a multi-function man-machine interface is provided, featuring
Display
Key combinations
Softkeys (menu-dependent multi-functional keys)
Keys with a fixed function (such as ON / OFF switch, ENTER key, numerical keypad, cursor control keys)
Controls (such as volume control and rotary knob)
Indicators (LEDs signalling the operating status)
â 2.8 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
'LVSOD\ RQO\; $
Reflecting its design as a software radio, the M3SR Transceiver controlled via GB 4000C relies
on a menu-based control concept, the operator being guided through the individual menus and
submenus and having a variety of selection options.
This chapter assumes that the individual functions or submenus are called up starting on the
main menu level. If necessary, press key MENU HOME (see chapter 2.5.1.4) to go to the main
menu straight from any other level.
7LWOH $UHD RI 0HQX
0HQX1R 5DGLR$GGU / &RQWURO 8QLW $GGU
0HQX7LWOH
Calls the
previous
menu
Calls the next page
of the same menu
L is only displayed if key
LOCAL is pressed (LOCAL
mode).
,QIRUPDWLRQ(GLW %R[
Overview of operating states
and fields for manual inputs
depending on the selected
operating mode
'LVSOD\)LHOGVZLWK6RIWNH\1DPHV
By using the associated softkeys various
functions and parameter settings can be
selected depending on the active menu
)LJ 'HVLJQRI'LVSOD\ 3ULQFLSOH
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.9 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
6RIWNH\V RQO\; $
2.5.1.2.1
Softkey Numbers
Softkey
No.
Softkey
No.
The softkey numbering as shown by the example above is maintained throughout this chapter.
2.5.1.2.2
Explanation of Softkey Symbols
The use of symbols in the menu-dependent softkey designations follows some simple rules:
This menu contains two pages. The page currently shown is page one.
One menu is following, which is opened by pressing the softkey. The current setting is shown in the direction pointed out by the black arrowhead.
Example:
This menu is disabled right now (letters light-faced, i.e. not bold) or it is not
present.
â 2.10 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
One menu is following. The current setting is shown in the second line (example: HIGH).
Example:
Toggle switch with two functions, the currently active function is highlighted.
Fixed function: The tone is produced as long as you keep pressing the
key.
(Three dots): Further menus are following.
After pressing the associated softkey a parameter can be entered/edited
manually. In the direction pointed out by the arrowhead, the value (e.g. frequency) is displayed.
Example:
Press to return to previous menu.
The asterisk (*) indicates that the new settings have not yet been stored.
When the menu is left without storing the new settings, a warning comes
up.
Press softkey SAVE * to save the current data or
Press key ENT to discard the
changes and leave.
Some basic concepts need to be explained in order to fully understand the following chapters.
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.11 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
2.5.1.2.3
Value Selection
Selection within a set of values (example: power) can be made in different ways:
1.
Press the appropriate softkey associated to the relevant display field as many times as
required, selection being made in forward direction. Confirm by pressing the ENTER key.
The previously set value remains highlighted until a new setting is selected and confirmed with ENTER.
Example:
Softkey
and
2.
Select by turning the tuning knob (in either direction). Confirm by pressing the ENTER
key.
Example:
Tuning Knob
and
Numerical values (example: frequency) can be set by using either the numerical keypad
or the tuning knob and the ENTER key.
Example:
and
or
â 2.12 â
and
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
An arrow after a figure means that if this numerical value has been changed it must be
confirmed with ENTER.
Example:
Toggle switches are actuated by just pressing the appropriate softkey, i.e. without
ENTER.
Example:
without
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.13 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
.H\VZLWK)L[HG)XQFWLRQ
Numerical keypad *)
Key ENT *)
Key ON / OFF
Key ESC / CLR *)
Key LOCAL
Key MENU HOME *)
Key ON / OFF *)
*)
Key SELECT
Button RESET
only X. 4410A
212)) Key (Control Unit GB 4000)
Switching the transceiver on (but not off), or during operation switching the display off and
on again.
0(18+20( Key (Control Unit GB 4000)
Switching the transceiver to the Menu 040 (MAIN) straight from any other level.
(6&&/5 Key (Control Unit GB 4000)
Deleting entries or aborting processes.
(17 Key (Control Unit GB 4000)
Confirming entries or initiating processes.
Numerical keypad (Control Unit GB 4000)
Input of numerical values and decimal point and in- or decrementing selection.
5(6(7 Button (Front Panel)
When pressing this button all software in the transceiver will be reset and after a short
time the software will be restarted. The last activated menu will be displayed.
â 2.14 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
6(/(&7 Key (Front Panel)
By using the SELECT key one of the AF sources for the loudspeaker can be selected that
have been configured in Menu 575 (FRONTPANEL AUDIO SOURCE), e.g. CL1 (Comline) or Guard U/V. A Comline is a functional unit of radio modules.
LED 1 lighted
1. Press key
LED 1 and 2 flashing
2. Press key
none of the LEDs lighted
3. Press key
LED 1 lighted
When CL1 is selected as AF source and communication mode V/D UNCP is active, the
guard receiver AF signal can be output at the loudspeaker in addition to the main receiver
AF signal, depending on the GUARD configuration (see Menu 110, page 1 (MANUAL
FIX.FRQ) and Menu 210, page 1(MANUAL PRESET FIX.FRQ)).
After power-on, Comline 1 is selected by default. This is indicated by illumination of
LED 1.
The following table shows how LEDs 1 and 2 are related and which AF signal is output
by the loudspeaker:
LED
AF signal
no AF signal
OLJKWHG
AF signal of main receiver and in addition of guard receiver, if
switched on via softkey GUARD in Menu 110 (MANUAL
FIX.FRQ) or 210 (USER PRESET FIX.FRQ).
IODVKLQJ
IODVKLQJ
AF signal of guard receiver (VHF band)
IODVKLQJ
AF signal of guard receiver (UHF band)
IODVKLQJ
AF signal of guard receiver (VHF and UHF bands)
/2&$/ Key (Front Panel)
1RWH
8VLQJWKLVNH\RQO\PDNHVVHQVHZLWK065 7UDQVFHLYHU; $
Activate local mode.
LED LOCAL lights up.
In the menu title area an âLâ comes up.
The transceiver is controlled exclusively via Control Unit GB 4000C, mod. 02. In local
mode the same functions are available as in remote mode, although here only communication mode V/D UNCP makes sense.
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.15 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
Running remote control sessions (fixed, advanced) are terminated.
Control units, which may be connected, are able to operate in remote control sessions
(monitoring) only.
In local mode the four audio lines (NB1, WB1, NB2, WB2) have no function. In voice
mode (V/D UNCP) the signal from the headset interface is used for carrier modulation.
The demodulated AF signal will be made available also at the headset interface.
ALC (automatic level control) is performed in the front panel unit, compensating volume
variations of voice signals. The Tx ALC cannot be disconnected.
Carrier activation is performed in voice mode (V/D UNCP) via the headset interface.
In Menu 550 (PTT COMLINE MAPPING) the four PTT lines (PTT_1, PTT_1L, PTT_2,
PTT_2L) can be configured also for local mode. For more details on PTT mapping refer
to chapter 3.
1RWH
:HUHFRPPHQGQRWWRFRQILJXUHWKH377OLQHVIRUORFDOPRGH
DVWKLVPD\UHVXOWLQXQZDQWHGFDUULHUDFWLYDWLRQE\RQHRIWKHFRQQHFWHGGHYLFHV
When local mode is left by pressing the LOCAL key, all settings which were active when
remote mode was last left will be reactivated. However, changes made in Menus 400
(RADIO MAINTENANCE) and 600 (RADIO SETUP) will be preserved!
For more details on communication modes, sessions, line mapping etc. see chapter 3.
212)) Key (Front Panel)
Switching the transceiver on or off.
â 2.16 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
By hitting the following key combinations on Control Unit GB 4000C and the Front Panel, respectively, special commands can be given to the M3SR Transceiver.
.H\FRPELQDWLRQRQ&RQWURO8QLW
RQO\; $
'HVFULSWLRQ HIIHFWRQ065 7UDQVFHLYHU
(6&&/5 and 212))
The radio initiates an Emergency Clear.
or
This works always, i.e. also in a Monitoring Session. No Advanced or Fixed Session is required.
(6&&/5 and .H\
Zeroize is available as output signal at connector contact X26.24 (AF1) (refer to interface description in Appendix A1).
In the case that a Cipher Unit KY58 is connected, emergency clear will erase the KY58
data.
0(18+20( and (17 at the same time
Initiates the procedure for system PIN number
input (see chapter 3).
System PIN numbers cannot be changed since
they are firmly tied to the hardware.
The following 4 keys at the same time:
Initiates a control unit RESET.
8SSHU OHIW VRIWNH\ and 212)) and
XSSHU ULJKW VRIWNH\ and (17
The control unit then re-establishes the remote
control connection to the radio and displays the
last menu active before the RESET.
.H\FRPELQDWLRQRQ)URQW3DQHO
'HVFULSWLRQ HIIHFWRQ065 7UDQVFHLYHU
6(/(&7 and 10 x /2&$/ within 10 sec
Sets the default IP (Internet Protocol) address:
Platform CPLAT set to 192.168.52.46
This is necessary when incorrect IP addresses
were entered and the default IP address is to be
used again for establishing a remote control
connection to a radio.
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.17 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
&RQWUROV
Tuning Knob
(only X. 4410A)
Volume Control
Headphone
Volume Control
Loudspeaker
Tuning Knob (Control Unit GB 4000)
Selecting values.
Loudspeaker Volume Control (Front Panel)
Adjusting volume:
Low: control turned fully counter-clockwise
Full: control turned fully clockwise
Headphone Volume Control (Front Panel)
Adjusting volume:
Low: control turned fully counter-clockwise
Full: control turned fully clockwise
â 2.18 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
,QGLFDWRUV
LED AC/DC
LED ON *) LED G *)
LED CU *) LED GO *)
*)
LED SQL M
LED SQL G
LED BATT
LED LOCAL
only X. 4410A
LED KEY
LED GO
LED CARR
LEDs 1 to 4
LED 21 (Control Unit GB 4000)
is illuminated when the control unit is on.
LED &8 (Control Unit GB 4000)
is illuminated when the control unit is fully operative.
LED * (Control Unit GB 4000)
lights up when the guard receiver squelch opens.
LED *2 (Control Unit GB 4000)
is illuminated when the transceiver is fully operative.
LED .(< (Front Panel)
signals that a device connected at the Fill Gun connector has been detected and that the
transceiver is ready to load data.
LED *2 (Front Panel)
signals that the M3SR Transceiver is fully operative.
LED &$55 (Front Panel)
signals availability of a carrier signal at the antenna connector in transmit operation.
LED 64/ 0 (Front Panel)
indicates reception of a signal by (main) Receiver ET 4400 (squelch).
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.19 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
LED 64/ * (Front Panel)
indicates reception of a signal by Guard Receiver ET 4400G.
LEDs to (Front Panel)
indicate which signal is being output via the loudspeaker (3 + 4 presently not used):
LED
AF signal
no AF signal
OLJKWHG
AF signal of main receiver and in addition of guard
receiver, if switched on via softkey GUARD in Menu
110 (MANUAL FIX.FRQ) or 210 (USER PRESET
FIX.FRQ).
IODVKLQJ
AF signal of guard receiver (VHF band)
IODVKLQJ
IODVKLQJ
AF Signal of guard receiver (UHF band)
IODVKLQJ
AF signals of guard receiver (VHF and UHF bands)
LED /2&$/ (Front Panel)
is illuminated when the LOCAL key has been pressed, indicating that the transceiver can
be controlled only locally via the integrated control unit. In addition, a headset (PTT key,
microphone), which may be connected, will be enabled as well.
LED %$77 (Front Panel)
signals availability of battery power.
LED $&'& (Front Panel)
signals availability of AC/DC power.
â 2.20 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
6ZLWFKLQJWKH7UDQVFHLYHU2QDQG2II
0657UDQVFHLYHU; $
2.5.2.1.1
Minimum Requirements
Before putting the M3SR Transceiver X. 4410A into operation make sure that the following minimum requirements are met:
â˘
AC Power Supply IN 4000A (or a battery complying with the technical specifications) is
available.
â˘
â˘
â˘
Antenna is connected.
Handset or headset is connected.
See also chapter 2.4 "Basic Cabling".
2.5.2.1.2
Switching On
1RWH
:KHQVWDUWLQJXSWKHWUDQVFHLYHUWKHODVWPHQXZKLFKZDVDFWLYHEHIRUHVZLWFKLQJRII
LVFDOOHGXSDJDLQRUWKHSURPSWIRU3,1HQWU\FRPHVXSLIWKHODVWPHQXZDV3,1SURWHFWHG
.H\ 212))
switches the transceiver on
(but not off), or during operation switches the display off
and on again
.H\ 212))
switches the transceiver
on / off
Press key ON / OFF on the Front Panel or Control Unit GB 4000C (see figure).
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.21 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
/(' &8
/(' 21
/(' *2
/(' *2
/('
/(' $&'&
All LEDs pointed out above are illuminated to indicate readiness for operation, their individual messages are:
 LED ON: control unit ready for operation
 LED CU: control unit ok
 LEDs GO: radio ok
 LED AC/DC: power available
 LED 1: indicates which signal is being output via the loudspeaker
1RWH
,I/('UHPDLQVGDUNSUHVVWKH6(/(&7NH\
The last activated menu is called up again, or the prompt for PIN entry comes up if the
last menu was PIN-protected.
â 2.22 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
2.5.2.1.3
Switching Off
.H\ 212))
switches the transceiver
on / off
Press key ON / OFF on the Front Panel.
Control Unit GB 4000C, mod. 02 (left-hand part of the control panel) may be switched off
separately by using the ON/OFF key on its front panel. In this case the display will go dark
although the radio is still operative.
1RWH
7KHFRQWUROXQLWGLVSOD\ZLOODOVREHGDUNZKLOHWKHVFUHHQVDYHULVDFWLYH
Press key ON/OFF.
Display goes dark and LED ON is
extinguished.
/(' 21
.H\ 212))
switches the control unit
display off and on
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.23 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
065 7UDQVFHLYHU; $
2.5.2.2.1
Minimum Requirements
Before putting the M3SR Transceiver X. 4460A into operation make sure that the following
minimum requirements are met:
â˘
Control Unit GB 4000C, mod. 03 (remote version) is connected with the transceiver via
LAN.
â˘
â˘
Control Unit GB 4000C, mod. 03 is connected with the power distribution system.
â˘
â˘
Antenna is connected.
AC Power Supply IN 4000A (or a battery complying with the technical specifications) is
available.
See also chapter 2.4 "Basic Cabling".
2.5.2.2.2
Switching On
switches the transceiver on / off
Press key ON / OFF on the Front Panel (see figure).
.H\ 212))
.H\ 212))
switches the control unit on / off
Press key ON / OFF on Control Unit GB 4000C, mod. 03.
â 2.24 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
Control Unit GB 4000C, Mod. 03
/(' &8
/(' 21
/(' *2
/('
/(' $&'&
/(' *2
All LEDs pointed out above are illuminated to indicate readiness for operation, their individual messages are:
 LED ON: control unit ready for operation
 LED CU: control unit ok
 LEDs GO: radio ok
 LED AC/DC: power available
 LED 1: indicates which signal is being output via the loudspeaker
1RWH
,I/('UHPDLQVGDUNSUHVVWKH6(/(&7NH\
The last activated menu is called up again, or the prompt for PIN entry comes up if the
last menu was PIN-protected.
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.25 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
2.5.2.2.3
Switching Off
/(' 21
.H\ 212)) switches the control unit display off and on
Press key ON / OFF on Control Unit GB 4000C, mod. 03.
LED ON is extinguished.
.H\ 212))
switches the transceiver
on / off
Press key ON / OFF on the Front Panel.
â 2.26 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
0HQX 5$',2&211(&7,21
Via Menu 010 the link setup between Control Unit GB 4000C and the radio is done.
Starting point: Switching On
The following display appears:
Address edit field
0HQX
No.
Control
Action
Notes
Setting logical radio address in the range
from 001 to 999.
Set address.
Confirm with
ENTER.
1RWH
:KHQWKH065 7UDQVFHLYHULVRSHUDWHGLQ
DQHWZRUNWKHDGGUHVVHVQHHGWREHFRQILJ
XUHGYLD0HQXV 5$',2$''5(66
5287( $''5(66/,67 DQG
&8$''5(665287(
:KHQSXWWLQJWKHUDGLRLQWRRSHUDWLRQWKH
ILUVWWLPH
Enter default address 46.
:KHQWKHHQWHUHGDGGUHVVGRHVQRWSHUPLW
WRFRQQHFWWRWKHWUDQVFHLYHU
Menu 800 (CU MAINTENANCE)
3.
Enter control unit maintenance PIN
number by using the numerical keypad, then press enter.
4.
Press softkey
Check if the address is in the control unitâs address list.
1.
Press key
Menu 040 (MAIN)
2.
Menu 835 (CU ADDRESS LIST)
Ă
This menu displays all addresses of
devices the control unit can connect
to.
Ă
If necessary, enter the required address in the address list.
Press softkey
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.27 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
0HQX &20/,1(6(66,21
In Menu 020 the operator can define the level of access, switch from COMLINE Session to
RADIO Session (Menu 030) or cut the connection between control unit and radio, if necessary.
The COMLINE session is the normal operating mode of the radio where all the COMLINE radio
operation parameters are set via Menus
â˘
â˘
â˘
110 (MANUAL FIX.FRQ),
210 (USER PRESET FIX.FRQ) and
300 (EMERGENCY).
Menus 400 (RADIO MAINTENANCE), 600 (SETUP) and 800 (CU MAINTENANCE) are accessible only by entering the respective PINs. The assignment of modules to particular Comlines
cannot be changed in a COMLINE session. For this a RADIO session is required, which is activated by entry of the respective PIN.
In the COMLINE session the following three levels of access are available:
FIXED
ADVANCED
MONITOR
â 2.28 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
â˘
FIXED
- In a FIXED COMLINE session, a fixed remote control connection is established between the own control unit and the radio which cannot be broken by third parties.
- Therefore FIXED COMLINE session is used whenever continuous remote control is
required.
&$87,21
,QD),;('&20/,1(VHVVLRQLWLVLPSRVVLEOHIRUIXUWKHUFRQWUROXQLWVZKLFKPD\
EHFRQQHFWHGWRWDNHUHPRWHFRQWURORIWKHUDGLR$QH[FHSWLRQWRWKLVLV/2&$/
PRGHZKLFKKDVWRSSULRULW\6RZKHQSUHVVLQJWKH/2&$/NH\D),;('&20/,1(
VHVVLRQZLOOEHLQWHUUXSWHG
â˘
ADVANCED
- In an ADVANCED COMLINE session, the remote control connection between a control unit and the radio can be broken by a third party. When another control unit has
taken remote control of the radio, the display of the local control unit visualizes a message to this effect.
- ADVANCED COMLINE session is used in normal radio control operation.
â˘
MONITOR
- In a MONITOR COMLINE session, the operator is able to passively monitor on the display of the control unit how control of the radio by another control unit is proceeding.
Active radio control via the own control unit is disabled.
- MONITOR COMLINE session is used for monitoring radio control.
- MONITOR COMLINE session suffices for maintenance actions accessible via PIN.
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.29 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
Starting point: Menu 010 (RADIO CONNECTION)
Press softkey (9)
and the following display appears:
0HQX
1RWH
6RIWNH\5$',26(66,21
LVGHVFULEHGLQFKDSWHU
softkey CONNECT
softkey DISCONNECT
Remote control unit logical
address
0HQX
â˘â˘
â˘
Selected Comline
(only 1 is possible)
own
001 to 999
400U (protocol)
Access level
â˘
â˘â˘
Type of radio connection
â˘â˘
â˘
â˘
No.
SIMPLE
S400U
MASTER
SLAVE
Control
only split-site mode
Action
Press softkey
SESSION.
Select setting.
â 2.30 â
blank = monitoring
ADVCD
FIXED
Notes
Selection of access level
021,7 Only monitoring operation.
$'9&' Command authority can be withdrawn.
),;(' Command authority cannot be withdrawn.
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
([DPSOH
The example below illustrates a control scenario of one transceiver and two control units, the
command authority changing between the two control units.
GB 4000C, mod. 03
Unit: 55
GB 4000C, mod. 02
Unit: 51
X. 4410A
Radio: 46
The M3SR Transceiver X. 4410A with local control unit (GB 4000C, mod. 02) may also be remote-controlled by a Control Unit GB 4000C, mod. 03.
GB 4000C, mod. 03 - Unit 55
GB 4000C, mod. 02 - Unit 51
Access level: advanced
Access level: monitoring
Control unit (55) controls transceiver with log- Control unit 51 can take control any time.
ical address 46 (ADR = own).
Detail of Menu 030:
CL
Detail of Menu 030:
TYPE
SESSION ADR
SIMPLE
ADVCD
own
CL
TYPE
SESSION ADR
SIMPLE
ADVCD
55
The operator sees that his control unit (55)
has advanced access level to the radio.
The operator sees that it is not his control unit
(51) that has advanced access level to the radio, but control unit (55).
Menu 040:
Menu 040:
Change access level to fixed
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.31 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
GB 4000C, mod. 03 - Unit 55
GB 4000C, mod. 02 - Unit 51
Access level is changed to fixed.
â The following message comes up:
Detail of Menu 030:
Detail of Menu 030:
CL
TYPE
SESSION ADR
SIMPLE
FIXED
own
Control unit controls transceiver alone and
cannot be interrupted.
CL
TYPE
SESSION ADR
SIMPLE
FIXED
55
When the operator tries to change the COMLINE session, the following message comes
up:
Change access level to monitoring
GB 4000C, mod. 03 - Unit 55
GB 4000C, mod. 02 - Unit 51
Access level is changed to monitoring.
â The following message comes up:
Detail of Menu 030:
Detail of Menu 030:
CL
TYPE
SIMPLE
SESSION ADR
CL
own
Control unit can take control any time.
TYPE
SIMPLE
SESSION ADR
55
Control unit can take control any time.
Press LOCAL key.
â 2.32 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
GB 4000C, mod. 03 - Unit 55
GB 4000C, mod. 02 - Unit 51
The following message comes up:
â The operator presses key LOCAL.
Only monitoring is possible.
Control unit controls transceiver in LOCAL
mode.
Menu 040:
Menu 040:
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.33 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
0HQX 0$,1
Starting point: Menu 040
If you come from any other menu,
press key
and the Menu 040 MAIN (HOME) appears:
0HQX
0HQX
0HQX
key MENU HOME
1RWH
6RIWNH\V5$',20$,176(783DQG
&80$,17DUHGHDOWZLWKLQFKDSWHU
for
future
use
Menu 040 shows the current operating status of the radio:
The following settings are active:
0DQXDO 0RGH
)L[HG)UHTXHQF\
Manual
radio operation
Tx/Rx frequency
Operation on
fixed frequency
Receive mode with squelch on
Transmitter level is OFF
Depending on the operation mode further displays are possible:
3UHVHW 0RGH
)L[HG)UHTXHQF\
Preset
page number
Tx/Rx frequency
Operation on
fixed frequency
Receive mode with squelch on
(PHUJHQF\ 0RGH
Emergency
radio operation
Transmitter level is OFF
Guard frequency
Operation on
fixed frequency
Receive mode with squelch on
â 2.34 â
Transmitter level is OFF
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
0HQX3DJH 0$18$/),;)54 )L[HG)UHTXHQF\
Menu 110 shows the current operating status of the radio. All operation parameters can be selected and edited by means of softkeys.
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
Press softkey (1)
and the following display appears:
Selected Comline
(only 1 is possible)
Selected radio operation mode
(only FIX. FRQ is possible)
Selected frequency
0HQX
page 2
softkey MANUAL...
for
future
use
1RWH
,Q0RQLWRULQJ&RPOLQHVHVVLRQ
RQO\VRIWNH\V35(97,0(
DQG3$*(025(DUH
HQDEOHG
Transmitter level
Receiver setup
Radio status
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
MODE.
RSSI indicator
Power indicator
Notes
Selection of radio operating mode (only
FIX. FRQ is possible)
),;)54
The radio performs standard fixed-frequency transmission and reception, without frequency hopping.
Press softkey
GUARD.
Selection of the guard receiver AF signal
that in communication mode V/D UNCP is
to be mixed to the main receiver AF signal.
Select setting.
2))
8+)
mixer and LED SQL G switched off
AF signal from guard receiver
(UHF channel)
9+)
AF signal from guard receiver
(VHF channel)
8+)9+) AF signals from guard receiver
(UHF and/or VHF channel)
Reception of an emergency call is indicated
by illumination of the SQL G LED, as well
as through a status message in the display.
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.35 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
POWER
Select setting.
Notes
Selection of transmit power
2))
/2:
0(',80
+,*+
Ă
Press softkey
MODU.
Select setting.
Press softkey
SQUELCH.
Tx is switched off
Tx is set to low power
Tx is set to medium power
Tx is set to high power
Exact levels in W are defined in Menu
516 (VU TX PARAMETERS).
Selection of modulation type
$0 amplitude modulation
)0 frequency modulation
Switches squelch function on or off.
2)) noise without Rx signal, no muting
21 Audio signal only if RF signal level is
above squelch level
Ă
Press softkey
TONE.
The squelch level is set in Menu 515
(VU RX PARAMETERS).
Produces test tone (1 kHz) for test and
monitoring purposes as long as softkey
TONE is pressed.
1RWH
7KLVWRQHLVWUDQVPLWWHGRQWKHVHOHFWHG
UDGLRIUHTXHQF\
12
Press softkey
MARKER.
Switches a marker tone on or off, if present.
Press softkey
FREQ.
Setting of a common frequency for Tx and
Rx operation in the frequency range from
Set value.
When a marker tone is present, the softkey
automatically shows ON as the current setting. The marker tone is output via a loudspeaker or headset. By pressing this
softkey the marker tone is switched off until
the next one occurs.
Ă
100 to 512 MHz (VHF/UHF transceiver) or
108 to 173.9875 MHz (VHF transceiver) or
225 to 399.9875 MHz (UHF transceiver)
The stepwidth is selected in Menu
110, page 2 (MANUAL FIX.FRQ).
1RWH
7KHWXQLQJNQREVHWWLQJQHHGVQRFRQILUPD
WLRQZLWK(17
â 2.36 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
0HQX3DJH 0$18$/),;)54 )L[HG)UHTXHQF\
Starting point: Menu 110, page 1
Press softkey (1)
and the following display appears:
0HQX
softkey PAGE 1/2 MORE...
no
function
No.
page 1
Control
,Q0RQLWRULQJ&RPOLQHVHVVLRQ
RQO\VRIWNH\V35(9DQG
3$*(025(DUH
HQDEOHG
Action
1RWH
Notes
See chapter 2.5.6, softkey 2.
Press softkey
CLIPPER.
Switches clipper function on or off.
(Noise reduction function only for receiver
in AM mode)
Ă
The CLIPPER level is selected in
Menu 515 (VU RX PARAMETERS).
See chapter 2.5.6, softkey 7.
See chapter 2.5.6, softkey 8.
11
Press softkey
COMM.
Example: Selection of a pre-defined communication mode, without device mapping
(see also chapter 3):
Select setting.
9'81&3
Voice/Data unciphered (not encrypted)
â˘â˘
Audio line NB1
Keyline PTT_1L / PTT_2L
:%$1$/2*
for wideband data transmission up to 16 kbps (baseband)
â˘â˘
6076.0822.12.02
Audio line WB2
Keyline PTT_1L / PTT_2L
â 2.37 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
No.
12
Control
Action
Press softkey
CHAN SP.
Select value.
Notes
Selection of the channel spacing value
The channel spacing of 8.33 kHz is only
available in the frequency range from
118 MHz to 144 MHz.
8.33 kHz and 25 kHz are used for civil Air
Traffic Control (ATC) in AM modulation.
25 kHz is standard in UHF band.
13
Press softkey TX
OFFS.
Select value.
Selection of the Tx offset value
Tx offset is used for ATC purposes. Softkey
TX OFFS is enabled in the frequency range
from 118 MHz to 144 MHz.
Tx offset is enabled with 25-kHz channel
spacing.
Tx offset selection is only available with AM
modulation.
1RWH
$Q\FKDQJHRIWKH7[RIIVHWZLOORQO\WDNHHI
IHFWZKHQWKHWUDQVPLWWHULVQH[WNH\HG
14
Press softkey
AF AGC.
Switches AF AGC function on or off.
The AGC controls the volume at the AF output for headphones and loudspeaker to a
constant value.
AGC = Automatic Gain Control
(of audio frequency)
â 2.38 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
0HQX3DJH 86(535(6(7),;)54 )L[HG)UHTXHQF\
The PRESET menu is used for operation with the presettings stored in a PRESET PAGE. A
few of the pre-defined values of the PRESET PAGE can also be edited and the new value can
be stored.
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
Press softkey (2)
and the following display appears:
Selected Comline
(only 1 is possible)
Selected preset page
Selected radio operation mode
(only FIX. FRQ is possible)
Selected frequency
0HQX page 2
softkey PRESET...
1RWH
,Q0RQLWRULQJ&RPOLQHVHVVLRQRQO\
VRIWNH\V35(97,0(DQG
3$*(025(DUHHQDEOHG
Current
communication
mode
Transmitter level
Receiver setup
Radio status
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
MODE.
RSSI indicator
Power indicator
Notes
Selection of radio operating mode (only
FIX. FRQ is possible)
),;)54
The radio performs standard fixed-frequency transmission and reception, without frequency hopping.
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.39 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
No.
Control
Action
Notes
Press softkey
GUARD.
Selection of the guard receiver AF signal
that in communication mode V/D UNCP is
to be mixed to the main receiver AF signal.
Select setting.
2))
8+)
mixer and LED SQL G switched off
AF signal from guard receiver
(UHF channel)
9+)
AF signal from guard receiver
(VHF channel)
8+)9+) AF signals from guard receiver
(UHF and/or VHF channel)
Reception of an emergency call is indicated
by illumination of the SQL G LED, as well
as through a status message in the display.
Press softkey
POWER.
Select setting.
Selection of transmit power
2))
/2:
0(',80
+,*+
Ă
Press softkey
MODU.
Select setting.
Press softkey
SQUELCH.
Tx is switched off
Tx is set to low power
Tx is set to medium power
Tx is set to high power
Exact levels in W are defined in Menu
516 (VU TX PARAMETERS).
Selection of modulation type
$0 amplitude modulation
)0 frequency modulation
Switches the squelch function on or off
2)) noise without Rx signal, no muting
21 Audio signal only if RF signal level is
above squelch level
Ă
Press softkey
TONE.
The squelch level is set in Menu 515
(VU RX PARAMETERS).
Produces test tone (1 kHz) for test and
monitoring purposes as long as softkey
TONE is pressed.
1RWH
7KLVWRQHLVWUDQVPLWWHGRQWKH
VHOHFWHGUDGLRIUHTXHQF\
â 2.40 â
Press softkey
MARKER.
Switches a marker tone on or off, if present.
When a marker tone is present, the softkey
automatically shows ON as the current setting. The marker tone is output via a loudspeaker or headset. By pressing this
softkey the marker tone is switched off until
the next one occurs.
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
No.
Control
11
Action
Press softkey
PAGE.
Notes
The PAGE function is used to load a specific User Page into the Current Page
range.
Set value.
The range of values is determined in Menu
610 (PRESET CONFIGURATION).
Preset count 1: 0 to 199
Preset count 2: 0 to 99 (preset = 1)
Preset count 2: 0 to 99 (preset = 2)
For definition of Current Page, User Page
and Loaded Page see chapter 3.
13
14
Press softkey
RESTORE PAGE restores the originally
RESTORE PAGE. Loaded Page in the User Page area.
Simultaneously the Current page is updated also to the Loaded Page.
Press softkey
SAVE PAGE.
By using the SAVE PAGE key the content
of the Current Page is stored in the User
Page.
The asterisk signals that User Page and
Loaded Page are no longer identical.
6076.0822.12.02
â 2.41 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
0HQX3DJH 86(535(6(7),;)54 )L[HG)UHTXHQF\
Starting point: Menu 210, page 1
Press softkey (1)
and the following display appears:
0HQX
page 1
1RWH
,Q0RQLWRULQJ&RPOLQHVHVVLRQ
RQO\VRIWNH\V35(9DQG3$*(
025(DUHHQDEOHG
Current
communication
mode
No.
Control
Action
Notes
See chapter 2.5.8, softkey 2.
Press softkey
CLIPPER.
Switches clipper function on or off.
(Noise reduction function only for receiver
in AM mode)
Ă
The CLIPPER level is selected in
Menu 515 (VU RX PARAMETERS).
See chapter 2.5.8, softkey 7.
See chapter 2.5.8, softkey 8.
11
See chapter 2.5.8, softkey 11.
â 2.42 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
0HQX (0(5*(1&<02'(
In the EMERGENCY menu, frequency band and transmit power for making an emergency call
can be selected. Reception of an emergency call is indicated by illumination of the SQL G LED,
as well as through a status message in the display. When the operator then changes to the
EMERGENCY menu, that frequency where the call was received on will be automatically set.
Then the operator only has to press the PTT key to answer the emergency call. Depending on
the configuration in Menu 575 (FRONTPANEL AUDIO SOURCE), the emergency call will also
be made audible via the loudspeaker. Softkey GUARD (see Menu 110, page 1 (MANUAL
FIX.FRQ) and Menu 210, page 1 (USER PRESET FIX.FRQ)) is used to select the guard receiver AF signal that in communication mode V/D UNCP is to be mixed to the main receiver AF
signal on the Comline.
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
Press softkey (3)
The following display appears:
Selected Comline
Guard receiver band
Selected guard frequency
No.
Control
Action
Transmit power level
Notes
Press softkey
Tunes to emergency frequency of transmitBAND to select the ter (VHF or UHF):
required band.
VHF = 121.500 MHz
UHF = 243.000 MHz
1RWH
:KHQWKHUDGLRUHFHLYHVDQHPHUJHQF\FDOOHJRQ
0+]DQGWKHRSHUDWRUWKHQFKDQJHVWR0HQX
WKHIUHTXHQF\RI0+]ZLOOEHWXQHGDX
WRPDWLFDOO\+RZHYHULIWKHRSHUDWRUVWLOOZDQWVWRVH
OHFW0+]WKHQKHRQO\QHHGVWRSUHVV
VRIWNH\%$1'
Press softkey
Selection of emergency transmit power
POWER to select
Tx is switched off
the required power 2))
/2:
Tx is set to low power
level.
0(',80 Tx is set to medium power
+,*+
Tx is set to high power
Ă
6076.0822.12.02
The exact levels in W are set in Menu
516 (VU TX PARAMETERS).
â 2.43 / 2.44 â
Power
Tone
TX Offset
Tx
Tx
Tx
---
---
12.5
25.00
XU:
100 ⤠f < 174
XD:
225 ⤠f < 400
XT:
100 ⤠f ⤠512
---
---
[3)
---
---
Wideband
Analog
---
---
12.5
25.0
XU:
100 ⤠f < 174
XD:
225 ⤠f < 400
XT:
100 ⤠f ⤠512
---
---
[3)
---
---
Wideband
Digital
Diphase
---
---
12.5
25.0
XU:
100 ⤠f < 174
XD:
225 ⤠f < 400
XT:
100 ⤠f ⤠512
---
---
[3)
---
---
Wideband
Digital
Baseband
---
---
25.0
FM
â 2.45 / 2.46 â
)LJ )XQFWLRQV5HODWHGWRWKH&RPPXQLFDWLRQ0RGH 5[5[7[7[
A separate audio line (NB1) needs to be configured in Menu 560 (AUDIO MAPPING).
Please note that in this case the AF1 interface cannot be used any more for voice modes.
only with 25-kHz channel spacing
---
---
[5)
n/a
---
Link 11
XD = XT:
225 ⤠f < 400
A separate audio line (e.g. NB2) needs to be configured in Menu 560 (AUDIO MAPPING)
---
---
[4)
12.5
25.0
8.33 2)
12.5
25.0
only AM and 118 ⤠f ⤠144 MHz
6076.0822.12.01
5)
4)
3)
2)
only AM
Channel
Spacing
in kHz
Rx/Tx
1)
Modulation
(AM / FM)
Rx/Tx
XU:
100 ⤠f < 174
XD:
225 ⤠f < 400
XT:
100 ⤠f ⤠512
---
---
XU:
100 ⤠f < 174
XD:
225 ⤠f < 400
XT:
100 ⤠f ⤠512
[1)
Clipper
Frequency
in MHz
Rx
Rx/Tx
[1)
AF AGC
[3)
X26.13
Rx
---
Muting
Guard
---
Squelch
Rx
Rx
Voice / Data
Ciphered
Voice / Data
Unciphered
)XQFWLRQ
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ0RGH
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
WELCOME
010 CONNECT
020 COMLINE SESSION
040 MAIN/MENU HOME
030 RADIO SESSION
505 RADIO OPTIONS
510 RADIO MODULES
Page 2/2
810 CU CBIT RESULTS
815 CU INVENTORY
820 CU ERROR LIST
835 CU ADDRESS LIST
840 DISPLAY PARAMS
- 2.47 / 2.48 -
811 CU CBIT DETAILS
816 CU INVENTORY DETAILS
821 CU ERROR DETAILS
836 CU ADDRESS ROUTE
710 EDIT PRESET PAGE FIX.FRQ
806 CU IBIT DETAILS
506 SET OPTIONS
511 PLATFORM PARAMETERS
512 AFI PARAMETERS
515 VU RX PARAMETERS
516 VU TX PARAMETERS
517 VU SYNT PARAMETERS
436 RADIO ADDRESS ROUTE
406 RADIO IBIT DETAILS
411 RADIO CBIT DETAILS
416 RADIO INVENTORY DETAILS
421 RADIO ERROR DETAILS
)LJ 065 7UDQVFHLYHU; $; $0HQX2YHUYLHZ
6076.0822.12.01
800 CU MAINTENANCE
600 RADIO SETUP
405 RADIO IBIT RESULTS
410 RADIO CBIT RESULTS
415 RADIO INVENTORY
420 RADIO ERROR LIST
425 RADIO CONTROL PORT
435 RADIO ADDRESS LIST
440 RADIO TIME
Page 1/2
400 RADIO MAINTENANCE
535 SPLIT SITE DEFINITION
550 PTT COMLINE MAPPING
560 AUDIO MAPPING
565 DEVICE MAPPING
570 SQUELCH POLARITY
575 FRONTPANEL AUDIO SOURCE
580 MARKER CONTROL
610 PRESET CONFIGURATION
620 LOADED PRESET PAGE PARAMS
805 CU IBIT RESULTS
807 KEYBOARD TEST
110 MANUAL FIX.FRQ (fixed frequency)
210 USER PRESET FIX.FRQ (fixed frequency)
100 MANUAL
200 PRESET
300 EMERGENCY
000 SYSTEM
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
6RIWNH\V
Squelch guard receiver active
0(18+20(
Switching to start menu 040
Radio ok
*2
Control unit ok
&8
Control unit is on
21
⢠Aborting processes
⢠Deleting entries
(6&&/5
⢠Initiating processes
⢠Confirming entries
(17
.H\V
Control turned fully clockwise
)XOOYROXPH
Control turned fully
counter-clockwise
/RZYROXPH
/RXGVSHDNHUKHDGSKRQH
YROXPHFRQWURO
Switching transceiver
on or off (toggle function)
212))
Selecting local / remote
operation (toggle function)
/2&$/
Selecting communication line
1 (2 to 4 disabled) = Rx and /
or GRx signal
6(/(&7
.H\V
AC / DC operation
$&'&
â 2.49 / 2.50 â
)LJ 0657UDQVFHLYHU; $&RQWURO DQG 'LVSOD\ (OHPHQWV
Squelch guard receiver active
64/*
Squelch main receiver active
64/0
Carrier activated
&$55
Radio ok
*2
Key system on
.(<
/('RQ
6076.0822.12.01
⢠Selecting menus
⢠Tuning values
Resetting the transceiver
%$77
5(6(7EXWWRQ
Local operation selected
⢠Incrementing or decrementing selection
7XQLQJNQRE
/2&$/
.H\
/('RQ
Communication line selected (2 to 4 disabled)
⢠Decimal point
VRIWNH\V
WR
⢠Numerical values
⢠Display of menu-dependent softkey
functions
Battery operation
/('RQ
1XPHULFDONH\SDG
,QSXWRI
'LVSOD\
⢠Display of menus
⢠OFF: switching only control unit
off
⢠ON: switching radio ON
212))
.H\V
Selecting menu-dependent
functions
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
VRIWNH\V
Control turned fully clockwise
)XOOYROXPH
Control turned fully
counter-clockwise
/RZYROXPH
/RXGVSHDNHUKHDGSKRQH
YROXPHFRQWURO
Switching transceiver
on or off (toggle function)
212))
no function
/2&$/
Selecting communication line
1 (2 to 4 disabled) = Rx and /
or GRx signal
6(/(&7
.H\V
6076.0822.12.01
â 2.51 / 2.52 â
)LJ 065 7UDQVFHLYHU; $&RQWURO DQG 'LVSOD\ (OHPHQWV
Squelch guard receiver active
64/*
Squelch main receiver active
64/0
Carrier activated
&$55
Radio ok
*2
Key system on
.(<
/('RQ
Resetting the transceiver
5(6(7EXWWRQ
AC / DC operation
$&'&
Battery operation
%$77
Local operation selected
/2&$/
Communication line selected (2 to 4 disabled)
WR
/('RQ
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Normal Conditions
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
8VH XQGHU 6SHFLDO &RQGLWLRQV
1RWH
$OOVHWWLQJVDUHWREHFDUULHGRXWE\TXDOLILHGSHUVRQDO V\VWHPDGPLQLVWUDWRU RQO\
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This chapter provides information concerning
Introduction to Communication Modes, Resources and External Devices
Configuration Examples
- Voice / Data Unciphered
- Wideband Analog
- Wideband Digital
- Link 11 (CLEW)
- Voice / Data Ciphered
Guard Receiver
Preset Pages
PIN Numbers
Configuration
- Menu SYSTEM
- Menu RADIO SESSION
- Menu RADIO MAINTENANCE
- Menu Radio SETUP
- Menu CU MAINTENANCE
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
,QWURGXFWLRQWR&RPPXQLFDWLRQ0RGHV5HVRXUFHVDQG
([WHUQDO'HYLFHV
The following diagram illustrates the relationship between Option Codes, Radio Modes, External Devices, Resources and Communication Modes:
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
Option Codes: code to select functionality of radio software
â˘
Comline: interface between Rx / Tx functional unit (radio modules) and resources.
Radio Modes: type of radio communication
Communication Mode: method for voice/data transmission
Resources: audio and PTT interfaces between radio and external devices
External Devices: type of data terminal equipment that can be connected at the audio interface
Option Codes
:KHQRSWLRQFRGHV
DUHHQWHUHGIXUWKHU
UDGLRPRGHVZLOOEH
FRPHDYDLODEOH
Radio Modes
 FIX.FRQ *)
 ...
7KHUDGLRPRGHGH
WHUPLQHVWKHDYDLOD
EOHFKRLFHRI
FRPPXQLFDWLRQ
PRGHV
 Link 11
 ...
:KHQRSWLRQFRGHV
DUHHQWHUHGIXUWKHU
FRPPXQLFDWLRQ
PRGHVZLOOEHFRPH
DYDLODEOH
External Devices
Â
Â
Â
Â
Cipher Unit KY58
Digital data terminal
Link 11 data terminal
...
2QFHD&RPOLQHLVDV
VLJQHGWRDGHYLFHE\
GHYLFHPDSSLQJIXU
WKHUFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
PRGHVZLOOEHFRPH
DYDLODEOH
2QFHD&RPOLQHLVDV
VLJQHGWRDGHYLFHE\
GHYLFHPDSSLQJWKH
UHVRXUFHVDOVRQHHG
WREHILUPO\DVVLJQHG
WRWKHGHYLFH
Resources
Communication Modes
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Voice / Data unciphered *)
Wideband analog *)
Wideband digital (baseband)
Wideband digital (diphase)
Voice / Data ciphered
Link 11
...
Keylines
9LDWKHFRPPXQLFD
WLRQPRGHWKHUH
VRXUFHVVHOHFWHGE\
377DQGDXGLRPDS
SLQJDUHDFWLYDWHG
Â
Â
Â
Â
 ...
PTT_1 *)
PTT_2 *)
PTT_1L *)
PTT_2L *)
Audio lines
Â
Â
Â
Â
Â
Wideband 1 *)
Wideband 2 *)
Narrowband 1 *)
Narrowband 2 *)
...
1RWH
*)
basic
)LJ 2YHUYLHZ
â 3.2 â
(DFKUHVRXUFHFDQEH
DVVLJQHGRQO\RQFH
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ0RGHV
Depending on the option codes, the external devices connected at the Comline and the currently active radio mode, one or several of the following communication modes are available:
Voice / Data Unciphered (V/D UNCP):
The communication mode V/D UNCP is used for narrowband AM and FM voice communication. The keyline selected by PTT mapping is used. Narrowband audio lines NB1 and
NB2 are available. Audio line NB1 should be used by preference.
Wideband Analog (WB ANALOG)
The communication mode WB ANALOG is used for wideband AM and FM communication with analog data terminals (only baseband). The keyline selected by PTT mapping
is used. Wideband audio lines WB1 and WB2 are available. Audio line WB2 should be
used by preference.
Wideband Digital Baseband (WB DIGITAL BB) and
Wideband Digital Diphase (WB DIGTAL DP)
The communication modes WB DIGITAL are used for data communication (ASK, FSK)
with digital data terminals (baseband and diphase). Carrier activation for transmission is
carried out via keyline PTT_1, and the digital data are transmitted via wideband audio line
WB1.
Link 11 (LINK 11)
The communication mode LINK 11 is used for data communication with Link 11 data terminals. Carrier activation for transmission is carried out via keyline PTT_2, and the data
are transmitted via narrowband audio line NB2.
Voice / Data Ciphered (V/D CP)
The voice encrypted by Cipher Unit KY 58 is transmitted via wideband audio line WB1.
Carrier activation for transmission is carried out via keyline PTT_1L. The KY 58 and the
M3SR Transceiver are interconnected via the following signals:
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
CGC (cipher ground control)
DPTT (delayed PTT)
PT/CT (plain text / cipher text)
BB/DP (baseband / diphase)
ZEROIZE
The following table illustrates how the radio operation mode is related to the communication
mode:
Communication mode
Radio operation
mode
V/D UNCP
WB
ANALOG
WB
DIGITAL BB
WB
DIGITAL DP
LINK11
V/D CP
FIX.FRQ
1RWH
:KHQFKDQJLQJWRDGLIIHUHQWFRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGHHJLQ0HQX 0$18$/),;)54 IXU
WKHUSDUDPHWHUVPD\EHFKDQJHGDXWRPDWLFDOO\:KHQFKDQJLQJIURP9RLFH'DWD8QFLSKHUHG
PRGXODWLRQPRGH$0FKDQQHOVSDFLQJN+] WR/LQNPRGXODWLRQPRGH)0DQGFKDQ
QHOVSDFLQJRIN+]ZLOOEHVHW+RZHYHUFKDQJLQJEDFNWR9RLFH'DWD8QFLSKHUHGZLOOQRW
UHHVWDEOLVKWKHLQLWLDOVHWWLQJVRIPRGXODWLRQPRGHDQGFKDQQHOVSDFLQJ
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.3 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
5HVRXUFHV
The Audio Frequency Interface (part of Radio Basis KR 4400) provides the following resources:
four keylines
- PTT_1L (contact X26.10)
- PTT_1 (contact X26.18)
- PTT_2L (contact X25.10)
- PTT_2 (contact X25.18)
four audio lines (narrowband, wideband)
- NB1 (contacts: Tx = X26.1 and .2; Rx = X26.3 and .4)
- NB2 (contacts: Tx = X25.1 and .2; Rx = X25.3 and .4)
- WB1 (contacts: Tx = X26.6 and .7; Rx = X26.8 and .9)
- WB2 (contacts: Tx = X25.6 and .7; Rx = X25.8 and .9)
Resources are activated in Menu 550 (PTT COMLINE MAPPING) for keylines and in Menu 560
(AUDIO MAPPING) for audio lines. Please note that each resource can be assigned only once.
That means that if for instance the resource PTT 1L is assigned to device A, it cannot be assigned to device B at the same time.
Keylines may also be defined to be low or high-active.
â 3.4 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
([WHUQDO'HYLFHV
A great variety of external devices may be connected to the M3SR Transceiver. This also
includes cipher units, digital and Link 11 data terminals. Before external devices can be used,
however, each of them needs to be connected to the Comline. This is done in Menu 565
(DEVICE MAPPING). A Comline is a group of modules within the radio (see also Menu 510
(RADIO MODULES)). Once the device is linked to the Comline, further communication modes
are available for use (see table below).
Communication mode
External Device
Comline
V/D UNCP
WB
ANALOG
no external device required
CL1
Cipher Unit KY58
CL1
Link 11 data terminal
CL1
Digital data terminal
CL1
WB
DIGITAL
BB
WB
DIGITAL
DP
LINK11
V/D CP
For the basic communication modes V/D UNCP and WB ANALOG, device mapping is not implemented. Resources are assigned via Menus 550 (PTT COMLINE MAPPING) and 560 (PTT
MAPPING).
Resource assignment to a device connected to the Comline is carried out automatically (see
table below).
Communication
Mode
Comline
Keylines
PLL_1L
V/D UNCP
CL1
PTT_1
PTT_2L
Audio Lines
PTT_2
NB1
WB1
according to PTT Mapping
NB2
WB2
External
Device
Mapping
V/D UNCP
CL1
V/D CP
&LSKHUXQLW
WB ANALOG
CL1
according to PTT Mapping
WB DIGITAL BB
CL1
WB DIGITAL DP
CL1
LINK 11
CL1
QRPDSSLQJ
'LJLWDOGDWDWHU
PLQDO
/LQNGDWD
WHUPLQDO
Consequently, not all resources are available for the basic communication modes V/D UNCP
and WB ANALOG. The table shows that simultaneous connection of a cipher unit and a digital
modem (SYNC WB DATA) is impossible because both devices need resource WB1.
Once the external devices are linked to the Comline, the operator can select the
communication mode he wants to communicate in by pressing softkey COMM in Menu 110,
page 2 (MANUAL FIX.FRQ).
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.5 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
&RQILJXUDWLRQ([DPSOHV
9RLFH'DWD8QFLSKHUHG
1RWH
1RGHYLFHKDVEHHQOLQNHGWRWKH&RPOLQHLQ0HQX '(9,&(0$33,1*
Voice transmission shall take place via narrowband audio line NB1 and carrier activation via
keyline PTT_1L (low-active). Modulation is in AM or FM.
M3SR Transceiver
Audio System
X26
AF Tx A NB
AF Tx B NB
AF Rx A NB
AF Rx B NB
PTT_1L
AGC (LSB)
AGC (MSB)
Squelch
Carrier
Communication
Mode
Comline
Keylines
PLL_1L
V/D UNCP
.1
.2
.3
.4
.10
.11
.12
.13
.20
CL1
PTT_1
PTT_2L
PTT_2
Press softkey
Menu 400 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
NB1
WB1
NB2
External
Device
WB2
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
1.
Audio Lines
6.
Select source CL1 by using the tuning
knob, then press ENTER.
7.
Press softkeys
Menu 550 (PTT COMLINE MAPPING)
2.
Enter maintenance PIN by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
8.
Select keyline PTT_1L by using the
tuning knob.
3.
Press softkeys
9.
Press softkey
10.
Select Comline CL1 by using the tuning knob, then press ENTER.
11.
Press softkey
Menu 560 (AUDIO MAPPING)
4.
5.
Select audio lines NB1 by using the
tuning knob.
Press softkey
â 3.6 â
to set the
PTT level to low.
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
12.
Press softkeys
25.
Press softkey
26.
Enter a new TX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Menu 570 (SQUELCH POLARITY)
13.
Select squelch SQ COMLINE 1 by using the tuning knob.
14.
Press softkey
to set the
squelch level to low.
15.
Range: -15 dB to 0 dB, if TX-ALC = ON
27.
Press softkey
28.
Enter a new RX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Press softkeys
Range: -20 dB to +10 dB
Menu 575
(FRONTPANEL AUDIO SOURCE)
16.
17.
Press softkey
18.
Select source CL1 by using the tuning
knob.
19.
Press softkeys
Menu 510 (RADIO MODULES)
20.
Press softkey
21.
Select module audio interface by using the tuning knob.
22.
29.
Press softkey
30.
Enter a new TX ALC ATTACK time by
using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
Select audio source 1 by using the
tuning knob.
Range: 10 ms to 100 ms;
30 ms recommended
31.
Press softkey
32.
Enter a new TX ALC DECAY time by
using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
Range: 100 ms to 2 000 ms;
300 ms recommended
33.
Press softkey
Press softkey
to switch on
the automatic level control.
Menu 512 (AFI PARAMETERS)
34.
Press softkeys
23.
Press softkey
35.
Enter a new value for SIDETONE
VOLUME by using the numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
24.
Select audio line NB1 by using the
tuning knob.
6076.0822.12.01
Range: -25.5 dB to 0 dB
relative to selected audio Rx level
â 3.7 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
47.
Select a new AF AGC DECAY time by
using the tuning knob, then press
ENTER.
Select module VU POWER
AMPLIFIER by using the tuning knob.
48.
Press softkey
Press softkey
49.
Enter a new threshold by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
36.
Press softkey
37.
38.
Menu 516 (VU TX PARAMETERS)
Range: 6 dB to 20 dB
39.
40.
Press softkey
Enter a new modulation depth by using the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
50.
Press softkey
51.
Select a new clipper level by using the
tuning knob, then press ENTER.
52.
Press softkey
53.
Select module VU SYN (synthesizer)
by using the tuning knob.
54.
Press softkey
Range: 10% to 99%; 90% recommended
41.
Press softkeys
42.
Select module VU RX (receiver) by
using the tuning knob.
43.
Press softkey
Menu 517 (VU SYN PARAMETERS)
Menu 515 (VU RX PARAMETERS)
44.
Press softkey
45.
Select a new AF AGC ATTACK time
by using the tuning knob, then press
ENTER.
46.
55.
Press softkey
56.
Enter a new value for TX Deviation
(FM, narrowband) by using the numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
Range: 1 kHz to 20 kHz;
3.5 kHz recommended
Press softkey
â 3.8 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
:LGHEDQG$QDORJ
1RWH
1RGHYLFHKDVEHHQOLQNHGWRWKH&RPOLQHLQ0HQX '(9,&(0$33,1*
Voice transmission is to take place via narrowband audio line NB1 and carrier activation via
keyline PTT_1L (low-active). Modulation is in AM or FM (see chapter 3.3.1). In addition, an analog data equipment is connected. Data transmission is to be carried out via wideband audio
line WB2 and carrier activation via keyline PTT_2L (low-active). Modulation is in AM or FM.
M3SR Transceiver
X25
AF Tx A WB
AF Tx B WB
AF Rx A WB
AF Rx B WB
PTT_2L
Analog Data
Equipment
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Communication
Mode
.1
.2
.3
.4
10
.11
.12
.13
.20
Comline
Keylines
PLL_1L
V/D UNCP
CL1
WB ANALOG
CL1
PTT_1
Audio Lines
PTT_2L
PTT_2
Press softkey
NB1
WB1
NB2
WB2
External
Device
Mapping
QRPDSSLQJ
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
1.
no sidetone
no squelch softkey
no ALC
no muting
Audio System
X26
AF Tx A NB
AF Tx B NB
AF Rx A NB
AF Rx B NB
PTT_1L
AGC (LSB)
AGC (MSB)
Squelch
Carrier
Â
Â
Â
Â
5.
Press softkey
6.
Select source CL1 by using the tuning
knob, then press ENTER.
7.
Press softkeys
Menu 400 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
2.
Enter maintenance PIN by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
3.
Press softkeys
Menu 550 (PTT COMLINE MAPPING)
8.
Select keyline PTT_2L by using the
tuning knob.
9.
Press softkey
Menu 560 (AUDIO MAPPING)
4.
Select audio lines WB2 by using the
tuning knob.
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.9 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
10.
Select Comline CL1 by using the tuning knob, then press ENTER.
11.
Press softkey
12.
PTT level to low.
Press softkeys
to set the
23.
Press softkey
24.
Enter a new RX LEVEL according to
step 22.
25.
Press softkey
26.
Select module VU POWER
AMPLIFIER by using the tuning knob.
27.
Press softkey
Menu 570 (SQUELCH POLARITY)
13.
Select squelch SQ COMLINE 1 by using the tuning knob.
Menu 516 (VU TX PARAMETERS)
14.
15.
Press softkey
to set the
squelch level to low.
28.
Press softkey
Press softkeys
29.
Enter a new modulation depth by using the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Menu 510 (RADIO MODULES)
Range: 10% to 99%; 90% recommended
16.
Press softkey
17.
Select module audio interface by using the tuning knob.
18.
Press softkey
1RWH
)UHTXHQF\UDQJH +]WRN+]
30.
Press softkey
31.
Select module VU SYN (synthesizer)
by using the tuning knob.
32.
Press softkey
Menu 512 (AFI PARAMETERS)
19.
Press softkey
20.
Select audio line WB2 by using the
tuning knob.
Menu 517 (VU SYN PARAMETERS)
21.
Press softkey
22.
Enter a new TX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Range: -3 dB to +15.5 dB
relative to 1.4 Vpp
0 dB
= 1.4 Vpp into 600 âŚ
-3 dB
= 1.0 Vpp into 600 âŚ
+15.5 dB = 8.0 Vpp into 600 âŚ
â 3.10 â
33.
Press softkey
34.
Enter a new value for TX Deviation
(FM, wideband) by using the numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
Range: 1 kHz to 20 kHz;
6.25 kHz recommended
1RWH
)UHTXHQF\UDQJH +]WRN+]
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
:LGHEDQG'LJLWDO
For voice communication, narrowband audio line NB1 is used, carrier activation is performed
via keyline PTT_1L low-active. Modulation is in AM or FM (see chapter 3.3.1). In addition, a
digital data terminal is connected. Data communication is carried out via wideband audio line
WB1 and carrier activation via keyline PTT_1 low-active. Modulation is in ASK (= amplitude
shift keying) or FSK (= frequency shift keying).
M3SR Transceiver
Audio System
X26
AF Tx A NB
AF Tx B NB
AF Rx A NB
AF Rx B NB
AF Tx A WB
AF Tx B WB
AF Rx A WB
AF Rx B WB
PTT_1L
AGC (LSB)
AGC (MSB)
Squelch
PTT_1
Carrier
 no squelch softkey
 no muting
.1
.2
.3
.4
.6
.7
.8
.9
10
.11
.12
.13
.18
.20
Digital
Data Terminal
Communication
Mode
Comline
Keylines
PLL_1L
PTT_1
Audio Lines
PTT_2L
PTT_2
NB1
WB1
NB2
WB2
External
Device
Mapping
V/D UNCP
CL1
WB DIGITAL BB
CL1
WB DIGITAL DP
CL1
'LJLWDO0RGHP
1RWH
,QGLSKDVHPRGHVLJQDOVFDQEHWUDQVPLWWHGZLWKDGDWDUDWHRIXSWRNELWV3OHDVHREVHUYH
WKHORZHUFXWRIIIUHTXHQF\RI+]%HORZWKLVIUHTXHQF\WKHGLJLWDO$0PRGXODWRUZLOOVZLWFK
EDFNWRFDUULHUOHYHO
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
1.
Press softkey
Menu 400 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
Menu 565 (DEVICE MAPPING)
4.
Select SYNC WB DATA by using the
tuning knob.
5.
Press softkey
2.
ENTER maintenance PIN by using
the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
6.
Select Comline 1 by using the tuning
knob, then press ENTER.
3.
Press softkeys
7.
Press softkey
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.11 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
Menu 512 (AFI PARAMETERS)
8.
Press key
(front panel).
9.
Press key
10.
ENTER maintenance PIN by using
the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
11.
again.
Press softkeys
22.
Press softkey
23.
Select audio line WB1 by using the
tuning knob.
24.
Press softkey
25.
Enter a new TX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Menu 560 (AUDIO MAPPING)
12.
13.
Check if audio line WB1 is connected
with Comline CL1. If necessary, connect.
Press softkey
Range: -3 dB to +15.5 dB
relative to 1.4 Vpp
1RWH
$SSUR[LPDWLRQWRWKHGLJLWDOLQSXWOHYHOZLOOVXIILFH
7KHVLJQDOZLOOEHGLJLWL]HGE\PHDQVRIDQLQWHUQDO
FRPSDUDWRU
Menu 550 (PTT COMLINE MAPPING)
26.
Press softkey
14.
Check if keyline PTT_1 is connected
with Comline CL1, if it is low-active
and only effective in remote mode. If
necessary, configure.
27.
Enter a new RX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
15.
Press softkey
Range: -3 dB to +15.5 dB
relative to 1.4 Vpp
0 dB
= 1.4 Vpp into 600 âŚ
-3 dB
= 1.0 Vpp into 600 âŚ
+15.5 dB = 8.0 Vpp into 600 âŚ
Menu 570 (SQUELCH POLARITY)
16.
17.
Select squelch SQ COMLINE 1 by using the tuning knob.
Press softkey
28.
Press softkey
29.
Select module VU POWER
AMPLIFIER by using the tuning knob.
30.
Press softkey
to set the
squelch level to low.
18.
Press softkeys
Menu 510 (RADIO MODULES)
Menu 516 (VU TX PARAMETERS)
19.
Press softkey
31.
Press softkey
20.
Select module audio interface by using the tuning knob.
32.
Enter a new modulation depth by using the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
21.
Press softkey
â 3.12 â
Range: 10% to 99%; 90% recommended
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
/LQN &/(:
For voice communication, narrowband audio line NB1 is used, carrier activation is performed
via keyline PTT_1L low-active. Modulation is in AM or FM (see chapter 3.3.1). In addition, a
Link 11 data terminal is connected. Data communication is carried out via narrowband audio
line NB2 and carrier activation via keyline PTT_2 high-active. Modulation is in FM.
M3SR Transceiver
X25
AF Tx A NB
AF Tx B NB
AF Rx A NB
AF Rx B NB
PTT_2
~LINK11
Audio System
X26
AF Tx A NB
AF Tx B NB
AF Rx A NB
AF Rx B NB
PTT_1L
AGC (LSB)
AGC (MSB)
Squelch
Carrier
Communication
Mode
.1
.2
.3
.4
.10
.11
.12
.13
.20
Comline
Keylines
PLL_1L
V/D UNCP
CL1
LINK 11
CL1
PTT_1
3.
PTT_2
NB1
WB1
NB2
WB2
External
Device
Mapping
/LQN'DWD
7HUPLQDO
7.
Press softkey
8.
Press key
(front panel).
9.
Press key
again.
10.
Enter maintenance PIN by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Press softkeys
Press softkey
Menu 400 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
2.
Audio Lines
PTT_2L
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
1.
 no sidetone
Link 11 Data
Terminal
.1
.2
.3
.4
.18
.21
ENTER maintenance PIN by using
the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Press softkeys
Menu 565 (DEVICE MAPPING)
4.
Select LINK 11 by using the tuning
knob.
11.
5.
Press softkey
Menu 560 (AUDIO MAPPING)
6.
Select Comline 1 by using the tuning
knob, then press ENTER.
12.
6076.0822.12.01
Check if audio line NB2 is connected
with Comline CL1. If necessary, connect.
â 3.13 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
13.
Press softkey
24.
Menu 550 (PTT COMLINE MAPPING)
14.
Check if keyline PTT_2 is connected
with Comline CL1, if it is high-active
and only effective in remote mode. If
necessary, configure.
15.
Press softkey
Enter a new RX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Range: 0 dB +3 dB
(effective level into 600 âŚ)
1RWH
:LWKD/LQNWHVWVLJQDORIN+]ZLWKN+]GHYLD
WLRQWKHRXWSXWOHYHOZLOOEHDGMXVWDEOHWR
G%G%P
25.
Press softkeys
26.
Select module VU SYN (synthesizer)
by using the tuning knob.
27.
Press softkey
Menu 510 (RADIO MODULES)
16.
Press softkey
17.
Select module audio interface by using the tuning knob.
18.
Press softkey
Menu 512 (AFI PARAMETERS)
19.
Press softkey
20.
Select audio line NB2 by using the
tuning knob.
21.
22.
28.
Press softkey
29.
Enter a value of 20 kHz for TX Deviation for Link 11 operation by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
30.
Press softkey
31.
Enter a new value for fine tuning of
synthesizer FM modulator by using
the tuning knob, then press ENTER.
Press softkey
Enter a new TX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Range: 0 dB +3 dB
23.
Menu 517 (VU SYN PARAMETERS)
1RWH
)LQHWXQLQJIRUN+]GHYLDWLRQ WHVWVLJQDON+]VL
QXVRLGDOZLWKHIIHFWLYHOHYHORIG%PLQWRâŚ
Press softkey
â 3.14 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
9RLFH'DWD&LSKHUHG
A Cipher Unit KY58 is connected and operated in baseband mode. For voice communication,
narrowband audio line NB1 and wideband audio line WB1 are used, carrier activation is performed via keyline PTT_1L low-active. Modulation is in AM or FM. In addition, a Link 11 data
terminal is connected. Data communication is carried out via narrowband audio line NB2 and
carrier activation via keyline PTT_2 high-active. Modulation is in FM (see chapter 3.3.4).
M3SR Transceiver
X25
AF Tx A NB
AF Tx B NB
AF Rx A NB
AF Rx B NB
PTT_2
~LINK11
Link 11 Data
Terminal
.1
.2
.3
.4
.18
.21
Cipher Unit KY58
X26
AF Tx A NB
AF Tx B NB
AF Rx A NB
AF Rx B NB
AF Tx A WB
AF Tx B WB
AF Rx A WB
AF Rx B WB
PTT_1L
AGC (LSB)
AGC (MSB)
Squelch
BB/~DP
~DPTT
Carrier
Zeroize
PT/CT
CGC
Communication
Mode
.1
.2
.3
.4
.6
.7
.8
.9
10
.11
.12
.13
.16
.17
.20
.24
.25
.26
to Audio System
Comline
Keylines
PLL_1L
V/D UNCP
PTT_2L
PTT_2
CL1
LINK 11
CL1
NB1
WB1
NB2
WB2
External
Device
Mapping
CL1
V/D CP
6076.0822.12.01
PTT_1
Audio Lines
&LSKHU8QLW
/LQN'DWD
7HUPLQDO
â 3.15 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
1.
Menu 550 (PTT COMLINE MAPPING)
16.
Check if keyline PTT_1L is connected
with Comline CL1, if it is low-active
and only effective in remote mode. If
necessary, configure.
ENTER maintenance PIN by using
the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
17.
Press softkey
Press softkeys
18.
Select squelch SQ COMLINE 1 by using the tuning knob.
19.
Press softkey
Press softkey
Menu 400 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
2.
3.
Menu 570 (SQUELCH POLARITY)
Menu 565 (DEVICE MAPPING)
4.
Select CIPHER UNIT by using the
tuning knob.
to set the
squelch level to low.
5.
Press softkey
6.
Select Comline 1 by using the tuning
knob, then press ENTER.
7.
Press softkey
21.
Select audio source 1 by using the
tuning knob.
8.
Select KY58BB or KY58DP by using
the tuning knob, then press ENTER.
22.
Press softkey
9.
Press softkey
23.
Select source CL1 by using the tuning
knob.
10.
Press key
24.
Press softkeys
20.
(front panel).
Press softkeys
Menu 575
(FRONTPANEL AUDIO SOURCE)
Menu 580 (MARKER CONTROL)
11.
Press key
12.
Enter maintenance PIN by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
26.
Press softkeys
Menu 510 (RADIO MODULES)
13.
again.
Menu 560 (AUDIO MAPPING)
14.
15.
25.
Press softkey
to enable
plain marker tone.
Press softkey
27.
Press softkey
Check if audio lines NB1 and WB1
are connected with Comline CL1. If
necessary, connect.
28.
Select module audio interface by using the tuning knob.
Press softkey
29.
Press softkey
â 3.16 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
Menu 512 (AFI PARAMETERS)
30.
Press softkey
31.
Select audio line NB1 by using the
tuning knob.
32.
Press softkey
33.
Enter a new TX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
43.
Press softkey
44.
Enter a new TX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Range: -3 dB to +15.5 dB
relative to 1.4 Vpp
Range: -15 dB to 0 dB, if TX-ALC = ON
0 dB
= 1.4 Vpp into 600 âŚ
-3 dB
= 1.0 Vpp into 600 âŚ
+15.5 dB = 8.0 Vpp into 600 âŚ
45.
Press softkey
34.
Press softkey
46.
Enter a new RX LEVEL according to
step 44.
35.
Enter a new RX LEVEL by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
47.
Press softkeys
48.
Enter a new value for SIDETONE
VOLUME by using the numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
Range: -20 dB to +10 dB
36.
37.
Press softkey
Enter a new TX ALC ATTACK time by
using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
Range: 10 ms to 100 ms;
30 ms recommended
Range: -25.5 dB to 0 dB
relative to selected audio Rx level
49.
Press softkey
50.
Enter a new value for MARKER
VOLUME according to step 48.
38.
Press softkey
51.
Press softkey
39.
Enter a new TX ALC DECAY time by
using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
52.
Select module VU POWER
AMPLIFIER by using the tuning knob.
53.
Press softkey
Range: 100 ms to 2 000 ms;
300 ms recommended
Menu 516 (VU TX PARAMETERS)
40.
Press softkey
to switch on
the automatic level control.
54.
Press softkey
41.
Press softkey
55.
42.
Select audio line WB1 by using the
tuning knob.
Enter a new modulation depth by using the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
6076.0822.12.01
Range: 10% to 99%; 90% recommended
â 3.17 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
56.
Press softkeys
65.
Press softkey
57.
Select module VU RX (receiver) by
using the tuning knob.
66.
Select a new clipper level by using the
tuning knob, then press ENTER.
58.
Press softkey
67.
Press softkey
Menu 515 (VU RX PARAMETERS)
68.
Select module VU SYN (synthesizer)
by using the tuning knob.
59.
Press softkey
69.
Press softkey
60.
Select a new AF AGC ATTACK time
by using the tuning knob, then press
ENTER.
Menu 517 (VU SYN PARAMETERS)
61.
Press softkey
62.
Select a new AF AGC DECAY time by
using the tuning knob, then press
ENTER.
63.
Press softkey
64.
Enter a new threshold by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
70.
Press softkey
71.
Enter a new value for TX Deviation
(FM, narrowband) by using the numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
Range: 1 kHz to 20 kHz;
3.5 kHz recommended
Range: 6 dB to 20 dB
â 3.18 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
*XDUG5HFHLYHU
The guard receiver is a common resource, meaning that it is not assigned to any particular
Comline.
There are two different ways for the guard receiver to be operated.
a)
Without audio mapping
 Plug the module Guard Receiver ET 4400G into the M3SR Transceiver. No audio mapping is necessary.
 The guard receiver is only available in communication mode Voice / Data unciphered
(V/D UNCP).
 Depending on the selection made by using softkey GUARD (Menus 110 (MANUAL
FIX.FRQ) and 210 (USER PRESET FIX.FRQ)), the guard receiver AF signal is mixed
to the main receiver AF signal.
 Depending on the selection made by using softkey GUARD, the LEDs G (Control Unit)
and SQL G (Front Panel), as well as a status message in the display signal an emergency call.
 Reception of an emergency call is signalled at contact X26.19 always, irrespective of
the selection made by softkkey GUARD.
 The volume of the GRx audio signal is configured in Menu 512 (AFI PARAMETERS).
b)
With audio mapping
 Audio line NB2 is assigned to the guard receiver via Menu 560 (AUDIO MAPPING).
 The guard receiver AF signal is available on audio line NB2 irrespective of the communication mode and the selection made by softkey GUARD (Menus 110 (MANUAL
FIX.FRQ) and 210 (USER PRESET FIX.FRQ)).
 Reception of an emergency call is signalled at contact X26.19 always, irrespective of
the selection made by softkkey GUARD.
 The volume of the GRx audio signal is configured in Menu 512 (AFI PARAMETERS).
1RWH
&RPPXQLFDWLRQPRGH/LQNFDQQRWEHXVHGZKHQDXGLROLQH1%LVDVVLJQHGWRWKHJXDUG
UHFHLYHU
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.19 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
3UHVHW3DJH
*HQHUDO
A Preset Page always consists of two areas:
 Fixed Frequency area
 EPM area (not used in this application)
For the Preset Pages the full choice of functions is available, regardless of the functions
actually supported by the relevant radio. So for example Link 11 communication mode
can be selected, although your radio may not have such functionality.
A plausibility check will only be performed when the Preset Page is called. So when
Link 11 mode is set in a Preset Page and this page is then called on a radio that does not
support Link 11 functionality, the default (communication mode V/D UNCP) will be activated instead.
When editing the Preset Pages make sure that matching parameters are selected. For
instance for communication mode Link 11 select modulation type FM.
â 3.20 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
,QWURGXFWLRQWR/RDGHG8VHUDQG&XUUHQW3DJHV
Page storage within the radio is based on a redundancy concept. There are three areas for the
Preset Page to be stored:
Loaded Page area: pages with factory and / or customer-predefined settings
User Page area: copies of Loaded Pages that can be edited
Current Page area: currently used page
/RDGHG3DJH$UHD
Pages with factory and / or customer-predefined settings are referred to as Loaded Pages and
can only be changed by the administrator. Identical copies of the Loaded Pages are used as
basis for User Pages and Current Pages, which can then be edited by the operator as required.
Normally Loaded Pages will be loaded into the radio via the Service and Maintenance Tool
ZS 4400. In some cases, however, it may be necessary to enter these pages manually, which
can be done only by an administrator having the required setup PIN. For editing a Preset Page
an editor (Menu 710 (EDIT PRESET PAGE FIX.FRQ)) is available. Softkey SAVE AS is used
to store the edited Preset Page as Loaded Page and simultaneously as User Page.
User Page
12
Loaded Page
12
)LJ (GLWLQJDQG6WRULQJD/RDGHG3DJH
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.21 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
8VHU3DJH$UHD
The User Pages are a copy of the Loaded Pages, which can be edited for ongoing operation.
User Pages can be restored to the Loaded Page settings either individually or globally. In the
figures below any text in italics indicates that this page has been edited.
By pressing softkey RESTORE PAGE (Menu 210 (USER PRESET FIX.FRQ)) a specific User
Page is restored to the relevant Loaded Page setting. Here Restore also has an immediate impact on the Current Page.
8VHU3DJH
User Page
Current Page
12
12
Loaded Page
12
)LJ 5HVWRULQJD6SHFLILF8VHU3DJH
By pressing softkey RESTORE PRESET (Menu 610 (PRESET CONFIGURATION)) all User
Pages are restored to the relevant Loaded Page settings. For this no particular User Page
needs to be entered. Here Restore has no impact on the Current Page.
User Page
User Page
199
199
8VHU3DJH
User Page
Loaded Page
)LJ 5HVWRULQJ$OO8VHU3DJHV
â 3.22 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
&XUUHQW3DJH$UHD
The currently used User Page is the Current Page.
User Page
Current Page
12
12
)LJ $FWLYDWLQJD6SHFLILF8VHU3DJH
The Current Page can be edited by the operator in the Preset Page editor (Menu 210 (USER
PRESET FIX.FRQ)). By pressing softkey SAVE PAGE the edited settings can be saved in the
User Page. A User Page modified in this way is marked by an asterisk.
Current Page
12 *
User Page
12 *
)LJ (GLWLQJDQG6DYLQJD&XUUHQW3DJH
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.23 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
3,11XPEHUV
To protect the radio system from tampering there are two levels of PIN (Personal Identification
Numbers) numbers in force:
System PIN
User PINs
System PIN
â˘
â˘
The System PIN is used to globally change the User PINs.
â˘
The System PIN is intended to be used by service or supervisor staff.
The System PIN is unique and firmly tied to one particular radio. The System PIN is derived from the equipment serial number and can be retrieved any time from the manufacturer, if lost.
User PINs
The User PINs are required to gain access to the Maintenance and Setup areas of the radio
and also when the operator wants to change from Comline Session to Radio Session. There
are three User PINs for the transceiver and one User PIN for the control unit.
Transceiver
â˘
Radio Maintenance PIN
The Radio Maintenance PIN is used to gain access to the Maintenance area. In the Maintenance area it is for instance possible to clear the error list and/or to configure the transceiver.
â˘
Radio Setup PIN
The Radio Setup PIN is used to gain access to the Setup area. In the Setup area it is
possible to create, modify and/or clear the Preset Pages.
â˘
Radio Session PIN
The Radio Session PIN is used to change from Comline to Radio session. In the Radio
session it is for instance possible to assign the modules to Comline CL1 and to reactivate
the default settings.
Control unit
â˘
CU Maintenance PIN
The CU Maintenance PIN is used to gain access to the control unit Maintenance area. In
the Maintenance area it is for instance possible to clear the error list and/or to configure
the display parameters.
These PIN numbers can be changed by the operator. The default setting (factory setting) of
these PIN numbers is "00000". But please keep in mind: Once changed, the default setting is
no longer valid and cannot be used any more.
Each PIN number to be entered or changed is a five-digit decimal figure.
â 3.24 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
The figure below illustrates when a User PIN needs to be entered and where it can be changed:
6HWXS
&RPOLQH6HVVLRQ
*)
5DGLR6HVVLRQ
0DLQWHQDQFH
Transceiver
= PIN required
= PIN changeable
*)
= not yet implemented
Control Unit
2SHUDWLRQ
0DLQWHQDQFH
The relevant User PIN can be changed in Menu 400 (Radio Maintenance), Menu 600 (Radio
Setup) and Menu 800 (CU Maintenance), respectively.
In addition, the User PINs can be changed globally via Menu 0 (System Menu).
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.25 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
&RQILJXUDWLRQ
0HQX 6<67(0
In Menu 0 (SYSTEM) the User PINs can be changed globally (for details on PIN numbers refer
to chapter 3.6).
Press key
The following display appears:
and key
simultaneously.
keys MENU HOME and ENT
softkey PIN RADIO SETUP
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey PIN
RADIO MAINT.
Notes
Entry of new radio maintenance PIN
Abort entry.
1.
2.
3.
â 3.26 â
Enter the RADIO SYSTEM PIN number
by using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
Enter new MAINT PIN number by using
the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Confirm the new MAINT PIN number by
repeating the entry by using the numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
For entry of a new radio setup PIN follow
the same procedure as described for the
radio maintenance PIN (see softkey 2).
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
No.
Control
Action
14
Notes
For entry of a new radio session PIN follow the same procedure as described for
the radio maintenance PIN (see softkey
2).
Press softkey PIN
CU MAINT.
Entry of new CU maintenance PIN
Abort entry.
1.
2.
3.
6076.0822.12.01
Enter the CU SYSTEM PIN number by
using the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Enter new MAINT PIN number by using
the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Confirm the new MAINT PIN number by
repeating the entry by using the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
â 3.27 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX 5$',26(66,21
Changing from Comline session to Radio session is required to
restore the default settings (see Appendix A1),
install radio options (Menu 505 (RADIO OPTIONS)),
connect a radio module to the Comline (Menu 510 (RADIO MODULES)),
configure split-site operation (Menu 535 (SPLIT SITE DEFINITION))
Starting point: Menu 020 (COMLINE SESSION)
Press softkey (8)
and the following display appears:
softkey RADIO SESSION
Enter RADIO SESSION PIN number by using the numerical keypad.
Confirm with ENTER key.
0HQX
0HQX
0HQX
0HQX
â 3.28 â
0HQX
for
future
use
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX3DJH 5$',20$,17(1$1&(
Via this menu the maintenance functions implemented in the radio are activated. The maintenance functions relate to the assignment of radio resources to Comlines, squelch polarity, inventory report, failure archive and initiation of IBIT functions. Access to some of the
maintenance functions is protected by a PIN (Personal Identification Number), for Inventory,
Errors and Radio Time, however, no PIN is required. Some maintenance functions should only
be activated by trained maintenance staff.
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
Press softkey (4)
and the following display appears:
softkey RADIO MAINT...
Enter maintenance PIN (5 digits) by using the numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
The following display appears:
0HQX page 2
0HQX
0HQX
0HQX
0HQX
1RWH
,Q5DGLRVHVVLRQ
VRIWNH\'()$8/7
6(77,1*LVHQDEOHG
1RWH
6RIWNH\V,%,7&%,7DQG
(55256DUHGHVFULEHGLQ
FKDSWHU
Press the relevant softkey to call one of these menus.
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.29 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
MAINT PIN.
Notes
Entry of new maintenance PIN
Abort entry.
1.
2.
Enter the new PIN number by using the numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
Confirm the new PIN number by repeating
the entry by using the numerical keypad,
then press ENTER.
See also chapter 3.6.
Press softkey
DEFAULT
SETTINGS.
10
1RWH
,Q5DGLRVHVVLRQWKLV
VRIWNH\LVHQDEOHG
Abort process.
â 3.30 â
Resets all maintenance parameters of
transceiver to default settings.
See List of Default Parameters in Appendix A1.
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX3DJH 5$',20$,17(1$1&(
Starting point: Menu 400, page 1
Press softkey (1)
and the following display appears:
0HQX page 1
0HQX
for
future
use
0HQX
0HQX
softkey PAGE 1/2 MORE...
0HQX
0HQX
0HQX
for
future
use
0HQX
0HQX
0HQX
Press the relevant softkey to call one of these menus.
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.31 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX 5$',2,19(1725<
This menu gives a survey of all hardware, software and firmware components installed in
M3SR Transceiver X. 4410A or X. 4460A.
Starting point: Menu 400, page 1 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (4)
and the following display appears:
see Appendix A1
Slot No. (see Menu 510)
0HQX
Types:
DEV - device, e.g. XT 4410A
SWM - identifier for software package
SW - identifier for software
FW - identifier for firmware
HWM - identifier for hardware module
HW - identifier for hardware
softkey INVENTORY...
Hardware installation
slot
No.
Control
Action
Notes
Press softkey
EQUIP.
Selection of equipment for radio inventory
Select setting.
Depending on the item selected the following components are listed:
all components installed
$//
&/
components of CL1
):
firmware components
+:
all hardware components
6:
all software components
+:02' name of the HW module article
6:02' name of the SW module article
'(9
XT 4410A or X. 4460A
â 3.32 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX 5$',2,19(1725<'(7$,/6
This menu displays administrative data of a component.
Starting point: Menu 415 (RADIO INVENTORY)
Press softkey (3)
Select component.
and the following display appears:
Example: Software Designation
The data for the component selected in
Menu 415 comprise the following:
 Type (hardware, software,
firmware)
 Name of module or software
softkey DETAILS...
 Ident. No.
 Variant
 Code No.
 Version No.
 Serial No.
 Production Date
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.33 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX 5$',2&21752/3257
Via this menu the serial control port parameters can be viewed and edited.
1RWH
2QHRIWKHSDUDPHWHUVWREHFRQILJXUHGLQ0HQXLVWKHSURWRFROIRUGDWDFRPPXQLFDWLRQYLD
VHULDOFRQWUROSRUW ; ,UUHVSHFWLYHRIWKLVVHWWLQJWKHSURWRFROXVHGDWWKH/$1LQWHUIDFHV
;DQG; LVDOZD\V*%33
Starting point: Menu 400, page 1 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (14)
and the following message appears:
3D\DWWHQWLRQWRWKH:DUQLQJ
Press softkey (9)
and the following display appears:
softkey CONTROL PORT...
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
PROTOCOL.
Select setting.
Notes
Selection of protocol type
121(
*%33
no remote control via control port
remote control via GB2PP protocol is
possible (RS 232, RS 422)
1RWH
2QO\IRUSRLQWWRSRLQWFRQQHFWLRQ
68
â 3.34 â
remote control via S400U protocol is
possible (RS 232, RS 422, RS 485)
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
No.
Control
10
Action
Notes
Press softkey
SAVE.
Saves the current settings.
Press softkey
PARITY.
Selection of parity
Select setting.
The asterisk (*) indicates that the new settings have not yet been stored.
121(
(9(1
2''
63$&(
0$5.
no parity
even number of bits
odd number of bits
parity fixed at 0
parity fixed at 1
11
Press softkey
STOP BITS.
Setting the number of stop bits
12
Press softkey
BITS/CHAR.
Setting the number of bits in the telegram
13
Press softkey
BITRATE.
Selection of bitrate
Select setting.
14
6076.0822.12.01
Press softkey
RS TYPE.
Selection of serial port standard.
Select setting.
5HJDUGLQJWKH56LQWHUIDFHSOHDVH
WDNHQRWHRIWKHIROORZLQJ
&60$&' &DUULHU6HQVH0XOWLSOH$FFHVV
ZLWK&ROOLVLRQ'HWHFWLRQ LVQRWVXSSRUWHG
E\WKHUDGLR%XVRSHUDWLRQLVRQO\SRVVL
EOHZLWK68SURWRFRO VHHVRIWNH\
DQG&RQWURO8QLW*% DSSOLFDWLRQSUR
WRFROSUHYHQWVFROOLVLRQV
1RWH
â 3.35 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX 5$',2$''5(66/,67
1RWH
:LWK065 7UDQVFHLYHU;7 $WKHDGGUHVVRIWKHLQWHJUDWHGFRQWUROXQLW
QHHGVWREHHQWHUHGKHUH
Starting point: Menu 400, page 1 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (13)
and the following display appears:
softkey ADDRESS LIST...
0HQX
1RWH
:HUHFRPPHQGWRHQWHUDOVRWKHUDGLRÂśVRZQDGGUHVV ORJLFDODQG,3DGGUHVV ,I\RXIDLOWRGR
VRDQGWKHQSUHVVVRIWNH\*(7)5205$',2 VHHFKDSWHU ODWHURQQRFRQQHFWLRQZLOO
EHHVWDEOLVKHGIURPWKHFRQWUROXQLWWRWKHUDGLR
â 3.36 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX 5$',2$''5(665287(
For addressing the M3SR devices the Internet Protocol (IP) is used. Therefore a unique IP
address needs to be assigned to each device, permitting the device to be identified and
addressed without ambiguity. In addition, each device needs a freely selectable logical address
in the range from 000 to 999, which is the address to be entered in Menu 010 (RADIO
CONNECTION) for addressed operation. The logical address spares the operator the tedious
task of entering the complex IP addresses.
Via Menu 436 the own address (logical and IP address) can be entered. When specifying the
Subnet Mask and the IP addresses (own and Gateway), please observe the IETF (= Internet
Engineering Task Force) standards (RFC pages (= Request for Commands)), in particular:
796:
Address Mappings
940:
Toward an Internet Standard Scheme for Subnetting
950:
Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure
1219:
On the Assignment of Subnet Numbers
1517:
Applicability Statement for the Implementation of Classless Inter-Domain
Routing
1519:
Classless Inter-Domain Routing: an Address Assignment and Aggregation
Strategy
1918:
Address Allocation for Private Internets
In compliance with RFC1918 the following address ranges are reserved for private networks:
10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255, associated subnet mask 255.0.0.0
172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255, associated subnet mask 255.255.0.0
192.168.0.0 to 192.168.0.255, associated subnet mask 255.255.255.0
The subnet mask defines the respective address parts for network address and local address.
Network address
Local address
Subnet mask
255
255
255
IP addresses
192
168
192
168
255
max. 256 units
0 reserved for network
255 reserved for broadcast
1RWH
â˘
â˘
,3DGGUHVVHVDQGDUHQRWSHUPLWWHGWREHXVHG
)RUWKHQHWLQIUDVWUXFWXUHHJURXWHUZHUHFRPPHQGWRXVHWKHORZHUORFDODGGUHVVHV
6076.0822.12.01
â 3.37 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
Starting point: Menu 435 (RADIO ADDRESS LIST)
Press softkey (11)
and the following display appears:
softkey ROUTE...
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey LOG
ADDR.
Notes
Changing the own logical address:
Change value.
Range of values: 001 to 999
Press softkey
IP ADDR.
Changing the own IP address:
Change value.
11
Press softkey
GATEWAY ADDR.
Changing the gateway address:
Change value.
1RWH
ZLOOGHOHWHDQH[LVWLQJ
JDWHZD\DGGUHVV
12
Press softkey
SUBNET MASK.
Changing the subnet mask:
Change value.
â 3.38 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
No.
Control
14
Action
Press softkey
SAVE TO RADIO.
Notes
Saves address and subnet mask to the
radio.
The asterisk (*) indicates that the new settings have not yet been stored.
6076.0822.12.01
When softkey SAVE * has been
pressed, the radio automatically performs a restart.
The following display appears:
Switch radio off and on again.
Enter the radio address (see Menu
010).
â 3.39 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX 5$',27,0(DQG'$7(
Via this menu the time and date stored in the radio can be edited.
1RWH
7KHWLPHDQGGDWHHQWHUHGKHUHDUHRQO\XVHGWRGHWHUPLQHZKHQH[DFWO\DQHUURURFFXUUHG
7LPHGDWHDQGHUURUDUHUHFRUGHGLQWKHHUURUOLVW 0HQX 5$',2(5525/,67
RU0HQX &8(5525/,67
Starting point: Menu 400, page 1 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (11)
and the following display appears:
softkey RADIO TIME...
No.
Control
Action
Notes
Press softkey
TIME READ.
When softkey TIME READ is pressed,
GB 4000C starts reading the current time
and date from the connected radio.
12
Press softkey
DATE.
Setting a new date
Set value.
13
Press softkey
TIME.
Set value.
â 3.40 â
The year can be set between 1999 and
2037. The date within the radio is adjusted accordingly.
Setting a new time
The time is entered in 24 h format. The
time within the radio is adjusted accordingly.
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX 5$',2237,216
In this menu all available radio options are listed.
Starting point: Menu 400, page 2 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (2)
and the following display appears:
Serial no. of options
controller
softkey OPTIONS...
List of radio options which
are installed and can therefore be activated
0HQX
1RWH
,Q5DGLRVHVVLRQVRIWNH\,167$//
237,21LVHQDEOHG
1RWH
7KH612 6HULDO1XPEHU RIWKHRSWLRQVFRQWUROOHULVWKHQXPEHU\RXQHHGWRVSHFLI\ZKHQRU
GHULQJDQHZRSWLRQIURP5RKGH 6FKZDU] 255.255.255.000)
2.
Defining the logical addresses and IP addresses
- Select a logical address that clearly identifies the particular device and is easy to remember.
Address
Logical
Associated IP =
network + local
46
192.168.082.010
192.168.082
010
47
192.168.082.011
192.168.082
011
48
192.168.082.012
192.168.082
012
50
192.168.083.010
192.168.083
010
51
192.168.083.011
192.168.083
011
52
192.168.083.012
192.168.083
012
55
192.168.082.020
192.168.082
020
68
192.168.084.010
192.168.084
010
- The logical and the local address may be identical.
3.
Defining the gateway addresses
- For each local network a gateway address is required
(192.168.082.001, 192.168.083.001 and 192.168.084.001).
- For the local address always use "1".
4.
Entering the logical addresses and IP addresses for those radios that are to be linked up
to
- We recommend to also enter the logical addresses and IP addresses of the control
units, because this will inhibit these addresses for radios and prevent multiple address
allocation.
5.
Entering the own address, subnet mask and gateway address in Menu 836 (CU ADDRESS ROUTE)
â 3.76 â
6076.0851.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; 0 ; 0
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
Starting point: Menu 800, page 1 (CU MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (13)
and the following display appears:
1RWH
:KHQVRIWNH\*(7
)5205$',2LV
SUHVVHGDQ\H[LVWLQJDG
GUHVVHVZLOOEHUHSODFHG
7KLVSUHYHQWVWKDWLGHQWL
FDO,3DGGUHVVHVZLWKGLI
IHUHQWORJLFDODGGUHVVHV
DUHFUHDWHG
softkey ADDRESS LIST...
0HQX
Select address.
Gateway:
Logical address
No.
Control
IP address
Type of device:
5 UDGLR
& UHPRWHFRQWUROXQLW
Action
EODQN
GHYLFHLVSDUWRIWKHORFDOQHWZRUN
GHYLFHLVSDUWRIDQRWKHUQHWZRUN
WREHUHDFKHGYLDDJDWHZD\
ZURQJFRQILJXUDWLRQ VHH0HQX
Notes
Press softkey ADD Adds address to the address list. Entry of
ADDR.
logical address and IP address for another
device:
Enter
Press softkey
DELETE
ADDRESS.
Deletes the selected address.
Abort process.
Press softkey
CHANGE TYPE.
Switches over between radio and controller
(control unit).
13
Press softkey GET Retrieves an address list from the assigned
FROM RADIO.
radio (see also Menu 435 (RADIO ADDRESS LIST)). In this way the control unit
obtains all addresses stored in the radio.
14
Press softkey SAVE Saves address list to the control unit.
TO CTRL UNIT.
The asterisk (*) indicates that the new settings have not yet been stored.
6076.0851.12.02
â 3.77 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; 0 ; 0
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX &8$''5(665287(
Via Menu 836 the own address (logical and IP address) can be entered. When specifying the
Subnet Mask and the IP addresses (own and Gateway), please observe the IETF standards
(RFC pages), in particular:
796:
Address Mappings
940:
Toward an Internet Standard Scheme for Subnetting
950:
Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure
1219:
On the Assignment of Subnet Numbers
1517:
Applicability Statement for the Implementation of Classless Inter-Domain
Routing
1519:
Classless Inter-Domain Routing: an Address Assignment and Aggregation
Strategy
1918:
Address Allocation for Private Internets
In compliance with RFC1918 the following address ranges are reserved for private networks:
10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255, associated subnet mask 255.0.0.0
172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255, associated subnet mask 255.255.0.0
192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255, associated subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Starting point: Menu 835 (CU ADDRESS LIST)
Press softkey (11)
and the following display appears:
softkey ROUTE...
â 3.78 â
6076.0851.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; 0 ; 0
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
LOG ADDR.
Notes
Changing the own logical address:
Change value.
Range of values: 001 to 999
Press softkey
IP ADDR
Changing of the own IP address:
Change value.
11
Press softkey
Changing the gateway address:
GATEWAY ADDR.
Change value.
1RWH
(QWU\RIGHOHWHVDQH[
LVWLQJJDWHZD\DGGUHVV
12
Press softkey
SUBNET MASK.
Changing the subnet mask:
Change value.
14
6076.0851.12.01
Press softkey SAVE Saves address list to the control unit.
TO CTRL UNIT.
The asterisk (*) indicates that the new settings have not yet been stored.
â 3.79 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; 0 ; 0
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
0HQX &8',63/$<3$5$06
In this menu the display parameters of the control unit are displayed and edited.
Starting point: Menu 800 (CU MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (6)
and the following display appears:
softkey DISPLAY PARAMS...
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
INDICATORS.
Set value.
Press softkey KEY
ILLUM.
Set value.
Press softkey
DATE.
Notes
Setting the LED brightness
Permitted range of values: 0% to 100%
Setting the front key illumination
Permitted range of values: 0% to 100%
Selection of the date format
Select format.
11
Press softkey
SAVE.
Saves the current configuration.
Press softkey
FREQ.
Selection of the frequency mode
The asterisk (*) indicates that the new settings have not yet been stored.
NORMAL:
Select setting.
ICAO:
â 3.80 â
6076.0851.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; 0 ; 0
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Use under Special Conditions
No.
Control
Action
Notes
Frequency
(MHz)
xxx.0000
xxx.0000
xxx.0083
xxx.0167
xxx.0250
xxx.0250
xxx.0333
xxx.0417
xxx.0500
xxx.0500
12
Press softkey
DISP TIMER.
Channel
spacing
(kHz)
25
8.33
8.33
8.33
25
8.33
8.33
8.33
25
8.33
Channel
xxx.000
xxx.005
xxx.010
xxx.015
xxx.025
xxx.030
xxx.035
xxx.040
xxx.050
xxx.055
Setting of the display timer in the range of
1 to 60 minutes (display goes blank).
Set value.
Permitted range of values: 0 to 60 min.
After this timeout the display goes blank.
13
Press softkey
BRIGHT.
Setting of the display brightness in percent.
Set value.
Permitted range of values: 0% to 100%
14
Press softkey
CONTR.
Set value.
6076.0851.12.01
Setting the display contrast in percent.
Permitted range of values: 0% to 100%
â 3.81 / 3.82 â
'HIDXOW
NB1
WB2
none
PTT_1L
PTT_1L
PTT_1
PTT_1L
PTT_1
PTT_2
SYNC WB DATA NB1
WB1
SYNC WB DATA NB1
WB1
LINK11
NB2
PTT_1L
PTT_2L
Keyline
NB1
WB1
CIPHER UNIT
Audio line
Device
FIX.FRQ
Radio operation mode
FIX.FRQ
Radio operation mode
FIX.FRQ
Radio operation mode
FIX.FRQ
Radio operation mode
WB
DIGITAL
DP
WB
DIGITAL
BB
V/D
UNCP
WB
DIGITAL
DP
Communication mode
WB
DIGITAL
BB
V/D
UNCP
Communication mode
V/D
CP
V/D
UNCP
Communication
mode
WB
ANALOG
V/D
UNCP
Communication
mode
LINK11
WB2
PTT_2L
NB1
PTT_1L
Analog Data
Equipment
Audio System
6076.0822.12.01
NB2
PTT_2
WB1
PTT_1
NB1
PTT_1L
WB1
PTT_1
PTT_1L
NB1
e.g.
Link 11 Unit (DTS)
e.g.
16-kbps Cipher Unit
Audio System
e.g.
16-kbps Cipher Unit
Audio System
Cipher Unit
KY58
)LJ $SSOLFDWLRQ([DPSOHVHJ;7 $
AF Interface 2
(X25)
AF Interface 1
(X26)
AF Interface 1
(X26)
CGC
DPTT
PT/CT
BB/DP
Zeroize
NB1
WB1
PTT_1L
AF Interface 1
(X26)
%RWKNH\OLQHVDUHHQDEOHGIRUERWKFRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGHV(JNH\OLQH377B/DFWLYDWHVWUDQVFHLYHU
LQ9'81&3DQG:%$1$/2*
AF Interface 2
(X25)
AF Interface 1
(X26)
â 3.83 / 3.84 â
Link11
Wideband digital
diphase
Wideband digital
baseband
Voice / Data
unciphered
Wideband digital
diphase
Wideband digital
baseband
Voice / Data
unciphered
Voice / Data
ciphered
Voice / Data
unciphered
Wideband analog
Voice / Data
unciphered
Communication Mode
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Operation under Special Conditions
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0DOIXQFWLRQ
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This chapter provides information concerning
Visual Inspection
Troubleshooting
- BIT Design
- BIT Radio (Menu RADIO MAINTENANCE)
- BIT Control Unit (Menu CU MAINTENANCE)
9LVXDO,QVSHFWLRQ
Check the following:
1.
Check external cabling between the complete transceiver and external equipment.
2.
Check all connectors for firm seating and the power supply cable and RF coaxial cables
at the rear for mechanical damage. If necessary, replace cables by new ones one at a
time until the defective connection has been found.
&$87,21
,IDFRQQHFWRUVKRZVDQ\GLVFRORXUDWLRQFDXVHGE\KHDWLWVPDWLQJFRQQHFWRULVDOVR
GHIHFWLYHDQGPXVWEHUHSODFHGWRR
Obvious damage of minor importance can be eliminated on the spot, provided that the appropriate equipment is available. In case of severe damage, the transceiver must be sent to the
nearest repair facility.
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ
Troubleshooting of the remote-controlled transceiver is possible by using for instance a Control
Unit GB 4000C, mod. 03.
%,7'HVLJQ
For detection of device and system failures Built-In Test (BIT) functions are implemented in the
equipment.
The BIT functions support the service team in detecting and analysing equipment and system
errors, helping them to decide on appropriate countermeasures.
PBIT
 The Power-on BIT is performed automatically after power supply has been switched
on.
CBIT
Â
Â
Â
Â
The Continuous BIT starts directly after PBIT.
The system is subjected to a functional check.
The modules installed in the radio basis are continuously checked by CBIT.
Warnings and/or error messages produced during ongoing operation are displayed in
Menu 410 (RADIO CBIT RESULTS) for the transceiver and in Menu 810 (CU CBIT RESULTS) for the control unit.
 As long as an error is indicated in Menu 410 (RADIO CBIT RESULTS), the GO LED
remains dark and connector contact X23.4 (NOGO) carries low level.
 Menu 420 (RADIO ERROR LIST) or 820 (CU ERROR LIST) displays all warnings and
error messages that have occurred, together with the time of occurrence.
 When malfunctions (warning or error message) have been detected, the failure is signalled to the control unit and/or via GB2PP protocol to a connected remote control unit.
IBIT
 The Initiated BIT is used for equipment diagnostics (test of LEDs, RF wiring etc.). IBIT
helps to localize failures and to support maintenance.
 It can be activated directly on the local control unit (Menu 405 (RADIO IBIT RESULTS))
and also by a remote control command (only GB2PP protocol).
 It takes several minutes for IBIT to be completed. It is possible to interrupt this test any
time and to continue later.
 During IBIT the transceiver is not available for operation.
 Please note that the radio is only ok if CBIT and IBIT both signal GO.
The rating of a BIT message can be either warning or error, depending on how serious the trouble is.
When there is a warning, operation may still go on, although the radio should be checked
as soon as possible. The GO LED remains lighted in the presence of warnings.
When an error is indicated, the radio is not working correctly and needs to be sent to the
next repair facility. The GO LED is extinguished in the presence of errors, and contact
X23.4 changes to low level.
Irrespective of the rating, a BIT message is reported in Menu 410 (RADIO CBIT RESULTS)
and/or Menu 420 (RADIO ERROR LIST). Please take care: the RADIO ERROR LIST contains
both errors and warnings.
CBIT always indicates the existing state, that means, as long as a BIT message is being indicated by CBIT, this problem persists.
â 4.2 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
%,75DGLR
0HQX3DJH 5$',20$,17(1$1&(
Via this menu the maintenance functions implemented in the radio are activated.
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
Press softkey (4)
and the following display appears:
softkey RADIO MAINT...
Enter maintenance PIN (5 digits) by using the numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
The following display appears:
0HQX
0HQX
0HQX
1RWH
6RIWNH\V,19(1725<
0$,173,1'()$8/7
6(77,1*65$',2
7,0($''5(66
/,67DQG&21752/
3257DUHGHVFULEHGLQ
FKDSWHU
Press the relevant softkey to call up any of these menus.
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.3 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX 5$',2,%,75(68/76
In this menu, an IBIT (Initiated Built-In Test) for the entire radio or a selected Comline can be
started. After completion of IBIT the results are displayed.
Starting point: Menu 400, page 1 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (2)
and the following display appears:
0HQX
softkey IBIT...
1RWH
6RIWNH\'(7$,/6LVRQO\
HQDEOHGZLWKVWDWXV(55
No.
Control
Action
Notes
Press softkey
EQUIP.
Select equipment.
Selection of equipment for IBIT
$// all components installed
&/ components of Comline CL1
1RWH
(UURUPHVVDJHVUHVXOWLQJIURP,%,7DUHGLV
SOD\HGVHOHFWLYHO\GHSHQGLQJRQWKHVH
OHFWHGHTXLSPHQW
Press softkey
START.
Terminate IBIT with
softkey STOP.
Starts IBIT for the selected configuration.
1RWH
,%,7FDQEHVWRSSHGDQ\WLPH
1RWH
3HUIRUP,%,7RQO\XQGHUWKHIROORZLQJFRQGLWLRQV
â˘
â˘
â˘
â˘
5DGLRRSHUDWLRQPRGH ),;)54
0RGXODWLRQPRGH $0
&RPPXQLFDWLRQPRGH 9'81&3 YRLFHGDWDXQFLSKHUHG
0DNHVXUHWKDWWKHIXOO9'&VXSSO\YROWDJHLVDYDLODEOHDWDOOWLPHVRWKHUZLVHWKHUH
TXLUHGWUDQVPLWSRZHUZLOOIDLOWREHREWDLQHGDQGDUHODWLQJ%,7ZDUQLQJZLOOEHSURGXFHG
,IWKHVHUHTXLUHPHQWVDUHQRWPHWDQHUURUPHVVDJHPD\FRPHXSZKHQWKH,%,7LVVWDUWHG
2QFHWKH,%,7LVFRPSOHWHGUHVHWWKHUDGLR NH\212)) 3OHDVHQRWHWKDWGXULQJ,%,7ORZ
SRZHUWUDQVPLWVLJQDOVDUHUDGLDWHG
As soon as IBIT signals anything other than GO, IBIT needs to be repeated. If the same error
persists, send the radio to the depot for repair.
â 4.4 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX 5$',2,%,7'(7$,/6
This menu displays information about an IBIT result.
Starting point: Menu 405 (RADIO IBIT RESULTS)
Press softkey (3)
Select message.
and the following display appears:
Message
Status:
Warning or Error
Explanation of
message
softkey DETAILS...
Ă
See also Menu 420 (RADIO ERROR LIST) and Menu 421 (RADIO ERROR DETAILS).
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.5 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX 5$',2&%,75(68/76
This menu provides information about the CBIT (Continuous Built-In Test) results. It displays
all currently existing warnings and/or errors. As long as an error persists, the GO LED is extinguished and contact X23.4 (NOGO) carries low level.
Starting point: Menu 400, page 1 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (3)
and the following display appears:
0HQX
softkey CBIT...
1RWH
6RIWNH\'(7$,/6LVRQO\
HQDEOHGZLWKVWDWXV(55
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
EQUIP.
Select equipment.
â 4.6 â
Notes
Selection of equipment for CBIT
$// all components installed
&/ components of Comline CL1
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX 5$',2&%,7'(7$,/6
This menu displays information about a CBIT result.
Starting point: Menu 410 (RADIO CBIT RESULTS)
Press softkey (3)
Select message.
and the following display appears:
Message
Status:
Warning or Error
Explanation of
message
softkey DETAILS...
Ă
See also Menu 420 (RADIO ERROR LIST) and Menu 421 (RADIO ERROR DETAILS).
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.7 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX 5$',2(5525/,67
This menu selectively displays all messages (warnings and errors) which have occurred in the
radio, depending on the selected equipment. The first list entry always refers to the most recent
error. Up to 100 errors may be listed. When the error list is full, a warning message comes up
prompting the operator to clear the error list. Failure to do so will close the error list for new
entries.
Starting point: Menu 400, page 1 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (5)
and the following display appears:
0HQX
softkey ERRORS...
The latest error
Error code
number
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
EQUIP.
Select equipment.
Error message
Notes
Selection of equipment for error list
$// all components installed
&/ components of Comline CL1
Depending on the selection, all errors or
only those concerning CL1 are listed.
â 4.8 â
Press softkey
CLEAR LIST.
Clears the complete error list in Menu
420.
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX 5$',2(5525'(7$,/6
This menu shows the details of an error.
Starting point: Menu 420 (RADIO ERROR LIST)
Press softkey (3)
Select error message.
and the following display appears:
softkey DETAILS...
The details of an error selected in Menu 420 comprise the following data:
 Name of error
 Error index
Consecutive error number in the radio error list
 Error Code
See Error Code List in chapter 4.3.2.8
 Comline
Comline No.
 Time
Time and date of error occurrence
 Level
Classification of failure: error or warning
 Repeat Counter
Number of occurrences
 Description
Description of failure
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.9 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
(UURU/LVW
Check the error code and proceed as indicated in the Action column (in most cases the radio
will need to be transferred to the nearest depot facility).
1RWH
(UURUFRGHV[[[DUHQRWOLVWHGLQWKHWDEOH,I,%,7 VHHFKDSWHU UHWXUQVD[[[HUURU
FRGH,%,7PXVWEHUHSHDWHG,IWKHHUURUSHUVLVWVVHQGWKHUDGLRWRWKHGHSRW
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0001
GR CNAPI ERR
Inform depot.
0002
GR General Software Error
Inform depot.
0003
GR ERR STR FULL
Error store full
Inform depot.
0004
GR FLASH CHCKS ERR
Checksum error of Flash
EEPROM
Inform depot.
0100
PL +2.5 V LOW
Platform error:
+25-V reference voltage
low
Send radio to depot.
0101
PL V_BATT LOW
Platform warning:
33-V battery low
Send radio to depot
(replace the platform battery).
0102
PL V_RET LOW
Platform error:
Retention voltage low
Send radio to depot.
0103
PL INT +10V LOW
Platform error:
Internal voltage +10 V low
Send radio to depot.
0105
PL INT -10V LOW
Platform error:
Internal voltage -10 V low
Send radio to depot.
0106
PL OVERTEMP
Platform warning:
Overtemperature
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature. If this fails to eliminate
the fault, send radio to depot.
0150
PL SRAM BATT EMPTY
Platform warning:
SRAM battery is low
Send radio to depot
(replace the platform SRAM battery).
0200
PS -12V LOW
DC power supply error:
Voltage -12 V low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0201
PS +3.3V LOW
DC power supply error:
Voltage +33 V low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0202
PS +5V LOW
DC power supply error:
Voltage +5 V low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0203
PS +12V LOW
DC power supply error:
Voltage +12 V low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0204
PS +33V LOW
DC power supply error:
Voltage +33 V low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
â 4.10 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0205
PS MAIN VLT LOW
DC power supply warning:
Main voltage (28 VDC) low
CBIT message:
Send radio to depot.
Frequent event:
Check configuration (Menu 511, function PWR SUP). Switch off and check
external power supply, cables and
connectors at X31. If this fails to eliminate the fault, send the radio to depot.
Single event:
Check configuration (Menu 511, function PWR SUP). Switch off and check
external power supply, cables and
connectors at X31.
0206
PS BATT VLT LOW
DC power supply warning:
Battery voltage low
CBIT message:
Send radio to depot.
Frequent event:
Check configuration (Menu 511, function PWR SUP). Switch off and check
external power supply, cables and
connectors at X31. If this fails to eliminate the fault, send the radio to depot.
Single event:
Check configuration (Menu 511, function PWR SUP). Switch off and check
external power supply, cables and
connectors at X31.
0207
PS VLT LW VLIM
DC power supply warning:
VLIM voltage low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0208
PS VLT EXT SW
DC power supply warning:
Voltage for external switch
low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0209
PS 28V LT AMP LOW DC
DC power supply warning:
28 VDC for left amplifier
low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0210
PS 28V RT AMP LOW DC
DC power supply warning:
28 VDC for right amplifier
low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0211
PS 28V DRV AMP LOW
DC power supply warning:
28 VDC for driver amplifier
low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0212
PS VLT PAX LW VLIM
DC power supply warning
Voltage power amplifier
below limit
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0213
PS OVERTEMP
DC power supply warning:
Overtemperature in power
supply unit
CBIT message or frequent event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature. If this fails to eliminate
the fault, send radio to depot.
Single event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature.
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.11 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0214
PS SPEED FAN1 LOW
DC power supply warning:
Speed of fan 1 at transceiver rear is too low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature. If this fails to eliminate
the fault, send radio to depot.
Single event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature.
0215
PS SPEED FAN2 LOW
DC Power supply warning:
Speed of fan 2 at transceiver rear is too low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature. If this fails to eliminate
the fault, send radio to depot.
Single event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature.
0216
PS DC UNDER VOLT
DC power supply warning:
CBIT message or frequent event:
External DC supply under Switch off and check external AC/DC
18 VDC
Power Supply IN 4000A, cables and
connectors. If this fails to eliminate the
fault, send radio to depot.
Single event:
Switch off and check external AC/DC
Power Supply IN 4000A, cables and
connectors.
0217
PS NO SYNC
DC power supply error:
External 100-kHz reference
not present
0218
PS OVERTEMP AC/DC
DC power supply warning:
CBIT message or frequent event:
Overtemperature in exter- Switch off and check external AC/DC
nal Power Supply
Power Supply IN 4000A, cables and
IN 4000A
connectors. If this fails to eliminate the
fault, send radio to depot.
Single event:
Switch off and check external AC/DC
Power Supply IN 4000A, cables and
connectors.
0250
SY DEF
Synthesizer error:
Module defective
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0251
SY VOLT ERR
Synthesizer error:
Voltage error
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0252
SY SYNC
Synthesizer error:
Synchronization error / bad
time reference
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0253
SY EXT FREQ REF
Synthesizer error:
Not locked to an external
reference
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0254
SY LEV LO OSC
Synthesizer error:
Local oscillator level low
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0255
SY SYNC ERR
Synthesizer error:
Synchronization/timing
error
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
â 4.12 â
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0256
SY PLL UNLOCK
Synthesizer error:
PLL unlock
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0257
SY FREQ CMD ERR
Synthesizer warning:
Incorrect frequency value
commanded
Inform depot.
270
HSELU FREQ CMD ERR
UHF filter warning:
Illegal frequency value
commanded
Inform depot.
271
HSELU NO OUTPOW
UHF filter error:
No output power. The error
message disappears after
the next faultless transmission.
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
272
HSELU NO INPOW
UHF filter error:
No input power. The error
message disappears after
the next faultless transmission.
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
273
HSELU VOLT ERR
UHF filter error:
Voltage error
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
274
HSELU DEFECT
UHF filter error:
UHF filter defective
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0300
RX OVERTEMP
Receiver warning:
Overtemperature in module
CBIT message or frequent event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature. If this fails to eliminate
the fault, send radio to depot.
Single event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature.
0301
RX EXT REF NOT PRES
Receiver error:
External 100-kHz reference
frequency not present
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0302
RX IF PART OVERLOAD
Receiver error:
IF part overload
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0303
RX IN SIG OVERLOAD
Receiver warning:
Input signal overload
CBIT message or frequent event:
Receive signal too large. Switch off
and check RF cables. If this fails to
eliminate the fault, send radio to
depot.
Single event:
Receive signal too large. Switch off
and check RF cables.
0304
RX GEN ERR
Receiver error:
General error
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0305
RX WATCHDOG
Receiver error:
Reset of ÂľP caused by
watchdog circuit
Send radio to depot.
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.13 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0306
RX INT REF DEF
Receiver error:
Internal reference defective
Send radio to depot.
0307
RX IF PART DEF
Receiver error:
IF part defective
Send radio to depot.
0308
RX INT LO DEF
Receiver error:
Internal local oscillator
defective
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0309
RX EXT LO NOT PRES
Receiver error:
External local oscillator not
present
CBIT message:
Send radio to depot.
frequent event:
Switch off and check RF cables. If this
fails to eliminate the fault, send radio
to depot.
Single event:
no action
0350
TX GLOBAL ERROR
Transmitter error:
TX is switched off due to
global error in module
Send radio to depot.
0351
TX PIN DIODE SW DEF
Transmitter error:
PIN diode switch defective
Send radio to depot.
0352
TX OUTPUT LOW
Transmitter error:
Output power below minimum limit
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0353
TX OUTPUT HIGH
Transmitter error:
Output power above maximum limit
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0354
TX OVERTEMP
Transmitter warning:
Tx is switched off due to
overtemperature in module
CBIT message or frequent event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature. If this fails to eliminate
the fault, send radio to depot.
Single event:
Check airflow of fans and ambient
temperature.
0355
TX WATCHDOG
Transmitter error:
Reset of ÂľP caused by
watchdog circuit
Send radio to depot.
0356
TX INCORR CMD
Transmitter error:
Received command is not
correct
Send radio to depot.
0357
TX OVERVOLTAGE
Transmitter warning:
Overvoltage
CBIT message or frequent event:
Switch off and check DC power supply. If this fails to eliminate the fault,
send radio to depot.
Single event:
Switch off and check DC power supply.
0358
TX EXT REF NOT PRES
Transmitter error:
External 100-kHz reference
is not present
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0359
TX VSWR
Transmitter warning:
Voltage standing-wave
ratio above limit
Switch off and check antenna cabling.
If this fails to eliminate the fault, send
radio to depot.
â 4.14 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0360
TX IN DRIVE MISSING
Transmitter error:
Input drive signal below
limit or missing
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0361
TX POW CTL LOOP LIM
Transmitter error:
Power control loop out of
limits
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0362
TX POW REDUCED
Transmitter warning:
Output power reduced
Check airflow of fans, ambient temperature, antenna cabling and DC
power supply. If this fails to eliminate
the fault, send radio to depot.
0363
TX TEMP SENS SH
Transmitter error:
Temperature sensor is
shorted / defective
Inform depot.
0400
GRX WATCHDOG
Guard receiver error:
Reset of ÂľP caused by
watchdog circuit
Send radio to depot.
0401
GRX EXT REF NOT PRE
Guard receiver error:
External 100-kHz reference
is not present
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0402
GRX VCO1 NOT LOCKED
Guard receiver error:
Loop of VCO1 (VoltageControlled Oscillator) not
locked
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0403
GRX VCO2 NOT LOCKED
Guard receiver error:
Loop of VCO2 (VoltageControlled Oscillator) not
locked
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0404
GRX IN SIG OVERLOAD
Guard receiver warning:
Input signal overload
CBIT message or frequent event:
Receive signal too large. Switch off
and check RF cables. If this fails to
eliminate the fault, send radio to
depot.
Single event:
Receive signal too large. Switch off
and check RF cables.
0500
AFI WATCHDOG
Audio frequency interface
error:
Reset of ÂľP caused by
watchdog circuit
Send radio to depot.
0501
AFI BUFFER OVERFLOW
Audio frequency interface
warning:
Sample buffer overflow
Inform depot.
0502
AFI CMD ERR
Audio frequency interface
error:
Received command is not
correct
Inform depot.
0503
AFI CODEC
Audio frequency interface
error:
Error in CODEC
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0504
AFI R/W ERR
Audio frequency interface
error:
Error during read/write
access
Inform depot.
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.15 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0550
FPGA1 R/W ERR
Platform error:
Test of internal circuit failed
Send radio to depot.
0551
FPGA2 R/W ERR
Platform error:
Test of internal circuit failed
Send radio to depot.
0552
FPGA3 R/W ERR
Platform error:
Test of internal circuit failed
Send radio to depot.
0600
IF CBIT OF EXT AMP
Pin TEST1 X278 / X288
CBIT warning of external
amplifier
CBIT message or frequent event:
Switch off and check external amplifier / filter, cables and connectors. If
this fails to eliminate the fault, send
radio to depot.
Single event:
Switch off and check external amplifier / filter, cables and connectors.
0601
IF CBIT OF EXT AMP
Pin TEST0 X2735 / X2835
CBIT warning of external
amplifier
CBIT message or frequent event:
Switch off and check external amplifier / filter, cables and connectors. If
this fails to eliminate the fault, send
radio to depot.
Single event:
Switch off and check external amplifier / filter, cables and connectors.
0602
IF VSWR OF EXT AMP
Pin VSWR X2720 / 37 /
CBIT message or frequent event:
X2820 / 37
Switch off and check antenna cabling.
VSWR warning of external If this fails to eliminate the fault, send
amplifier
radio to depot.
Single event:
Switch off and check antenna cabling.
0603
EXT PA TUNING X27
Pin TX_INHIBIT 0 X274
Tuning error of external filter (testing period 20 s
before output of warning)
Switch off and check external filter,
cables and connectors. If this fails to
eliminate the fault, send radio to
depot.
0604
EXT PA TUNING X27
Pin TX_INHIBIT 1 X2722
Tuning error of external filter (testing period 20 s
before output of warning)
Switch off and check external filter,
cables and connectors. If this fails to
eliminate the fault, send radio to
depot.
0605
EXT PA TUNING X28
Pin TX_INHIBIT 2 X284
Tuning error of external filter (testing period 20 s
before output of warning)
Switch off and check external filter,
cables and connectors. If this fails to
eliminate the fault, send radio to
depot.
0606
EXT PA TUNING X28
Pin TX_INHIBIT 3 X2822
Tuning error of external filter (testing period 20 s
before output of warning)
Switch off and check external filter,
cables and connectors. If this fails to
eliminate the fault, send radio to
depot.
0700
PL PLL1 UNLOCK
Platform warning:
PLL1 is unlocked
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
0701
PL PLL1 NO REF FREQ
Platform warning:
Check configuration (Menu 511, funcNo reference frequency for
tion EXT REF).
PLL1
Check the cabling at interface X10.
If required, change the configuration
or replace the cable if external reference is ok.
0702
PL OCXO TEMP
Platform warning:
Temperature of OCXO low
â 4.16 â
Warning occurs either when changing from TCXO to OCXO or while
oven-controlled oscillator is in warmup phase.
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0703
PL PLL2 UNLOCK
0704
PL PLL2 NO REF FREQ
6076.0822.12.01
Platform error:
PLL2 is unlocked
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
Platform error:
Check configuration (Menu 511, funcNo reference frequency for
tion EXT REF).
PLL2
Check the cabling at interface X10.
If required, change the configuration
or replace the cable if external reference is ok.
â 4.17 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
%,7&RQWURO8QLW
0HQX &80$,17(1$1&(
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
Press softkey (6)
and the following display appears:
softkey CU... MAINT
Enter control unit maintenance PIN number (5 digits) by using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
The following display appears:
0HQX
0HQX
0HQX
1RWH
6RIWNH\V,19(1725<
0$,173,1',63/$<
3$5$06DQG
$''5(66/,67DUH
GHVFULEHGLQFKDSWHU
Press the relevant softkey to call up any of these menus.
â 4.18 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX &8,%,75(68/76
In this menu the operator can start an IBIT (Initiated Built-In Test) for the Control Unit. When
IBIT is completed the results are displayed.
Starting point: Menu 800 (CU MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (2)
and the following display appears:
0HQX
0HQX
softkey IBIT...
1RWH
6RIWNH\'(7$,/6LVRQO\
HQDEOHGZLWKVWDWXV(55
No.
Control
Action
Press softkey
START.
Terminate IBIT
with softkey STOP.
Notes
Starts IBIT.
1RWH
,%,7FDQEHVWRSSHGDQ\WLPH
The keyboard test starts automatically.
Press keys ESC/
CLR plus ENT at
the same time.
Terminate keyboard test with
softkey KEYBD
TEST.
As soon as IBIT signals anything other than GO, IBIT needs to be repeated. If the error persists,
send the radio to the depot for repair.
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.19 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX &8,%,7'(7$,/6
This menu displays information about an IBIT result.
Starting point: Menu 805 (CU IBIT RESULTS)
Press softkey (3)
Select message.
and the following display appears:
Message
Status:
Warning or Error
Explanation of
message
softkey DETAILS...
Ă
See also Menu 820 (CU ERROR LIST) and Menu 821 (CU ERROR DETAILS).
â 4.20 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX &8.(<%2$5'7(67
In the Keyboard Test the keyboard is checked for proper functioning. For this test the operator
should press all keys and softkeys one after the other. The display shows which key has just
been pressed. The keyboard test can be stopped any time by pressing keys ESC/CLR and
ENT simultaneously.
When triggering the IBIT in Menu 805 the keyboard test is started automatically.
Starting point: Menu 805 (CU IBIT RESULTS)
Press softkey (14)
and the following display appears:
softkey KEYBD TEST...
After ten seconds the display returns to Menu 805.
or:
Press keys ESC/CLR plus ENT at the same time.
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.21 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX &8&%,75(68/76
In this menu the results for the Control Unit CBIT (Continuous Built-In Test) are displayed.
Starting point: Menu 800 (CU MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (3)
softkey CBIT...
and the following display appears:
0HQX
1RWH
6RIWNH\'(7$,/6LVRQO\
HQDEOHGZLWKVWDWXV(55
â 4.22 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX &8&%,7'(7$,/6
This menu displays information about a CBIT result.
Starting point: Menu 810 (CU CBIT RESULTS)
Press softkey (3)
Select message.
and the following display appears:
Message
Status:
Warning or Error
Explanation of
message
softkey DETAILS...
Ă
See also Menu 820 (CU ERROR LIST) and Menu 821 (CU ERROR DETAILS).
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.23 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX &8(5525/,67
This menu displays all errors which have occurred in the control unit. The first list entry always
refers to the most recent error. Up to 100 errors may be listed. When the error list is full, a warning message comes up prompting the operator to clear the error list. Failure to do so will close
the error list for new entries.
Starting point: Menu 800 (CU MAINTENANCE)
Press softkey (5)
The following display appears:
0HQX
softkey ERRORS...
The latest error
Error code
number
No.
â 4.24 â
Control
Action
Press softkey
CLEAR LIST.
Error message
Notes
Clears the complete error list in Menu
820.
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
0HQX &8(5525'(7$,/6
This menu shows the details of an error.
Starting point: Menu 820 (CU ERROR LIST)
Press softkey (3)
Select error message.
and the following display appears:
softkey DETAILS...
The details of an error selected in Menu 820 comprise the following data:
 Name of error
 Error index
Consecutive error number in the CU error list
 Error Code
Error Code List
 Time
Time and date of error occurrence
 Level
Classification of failure: error or warning
 Repeat Counter
Number of occurrences
 Description
Description of failure
6076.0822.12.01
â 4.25 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Malfunction
(UURU/LVW
Check the error code and proceed as indicated in the Action column (in most cases the radio
will need to be transferred to the nearest depot facility).
Code Message
Level Notes
Action
(CBIT message,
frequent or single event)
0002
GR General Software Error
0003
GR ERR STR FULL
Error store full
Inform depot.
1000
CP +28V RANGE
Control panel +28 VDC
out of range
Send radio to depot.
1001
CP +2.5V RANGE
Control panel +2.5 VDC
out of range
Send radio to depot.
1002
CP +3.3V RANGE
Control panel +3.3 VDC
out of range
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
1003
CP +5.0V RANGE
Control panel +5.0 VDC
out of range
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
1004
CP +12V RANGE
Control panel +12 VDC
out of range
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
1005
CP -12V RANGE
Control panel -12 VDC
out of range
CBIT message or frequent event:
Send radio to depot.
Single event:
no action
1006
CP OVERTEMP
Control panel
overtemperature
Check / correct ambient temperature
(must be below 55 °C). If this fails to
eliminate the fault, send the radio to
the depot.
1007 *)
CP SRAM BATT LOW
Control panel interfaces
SRAM battery low
Send radio to depot.
3000
TEST1 ALTERA_RDBK
Read back test of FPGA
failed
Send radio to depot.
3001
TEST1 EPSON_RDBK
Read back test of the display controller failed
Send radio to depot.
3002
TEST3 LOOPB IRDA
Loopback test of the IRDA
interface failed
Send radio to depot.
3005
TEST3 LOOPB KDD
Loopback test of the KDD
serial port failed
Send radio to depot.
3006
TEST3 LOOPB SMC2
Loopback test of the serial
port SMC2 failed
Send radio to depot.
*)
Inform depot.
The SRAM battery is not a replaceable battery but a gold capacitor.
â 4.26 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Maintenance
0DLQWHQDQFH
1RWH
$OOPDLQWHQDQFHLVWREHFDUULHGRXWE\TXDOLILHGSHUVRQDORQO\
6FKHGXOHG0DLQWHQDQFH
We recommend to readjust the oscillators (TCXO and OCXO, part of Radio Platform
HPLAT, see the relevant Service Manual) one year after the M3SR Transceiver was first
put into operation. Only this can guarantee that the specification is met.
The backup battery (part of Radio Platform HPLAT, see the relevant Service Manual)
need to be replaced once every three years after installation (see figure below).
Label: Date of battery installation
The filter mat of the dust protection filter needs to be cleaned or replaced (ident. no.
6102.6092.00) at certain intervals. The time interval depends on the environmental conditions the transceiver is operated in. To remove the filter mat proceed as follows:
1. Undo the two screws (see figure below) fixing the cover to the front panel.
e.g. XT 4410A
2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Remove the filter mat from the ventilating duct.
4. Clean the filter mat by using compressed air or water.
5. Re-insert the cleaned and dried filter mat into the ventilating duct.
6. Perform steps 1 and 2 in the reverse order.
Otherwise the transceiver is free from scheduled maintenance.
6076.0822.12.01
â 5.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Maintenance
7DNLQJ&DUH
Such measures involve cleaning and touching up slight blemishes in the varnish coat of the
transceiver. The following materials are required:
,WHP
'HVFULSWLRQ
Soft brush
Duster
Cleaning compound, e.g.
suds, household detergent
Varnish
Front panel:
RAL 7947 telegrey
Chassis:
KB90 grey
&OHDQLQJ
:$51,1*
:HDUJRJJOHVZKHQZRUNLQJZLWKFRPSUHVVHGDLU
LQRUGHUWRDYRLGH\HLQMXULHV
&$87,21
'LUHFWFRPSUHVVHGDLUILUVWWRZDUGVJURXQGXQWLOQRPRUHFRQGHQVHGZDWHULVFRQWDLQHG
LQWKHDLUMHW
.HHSDPLQLPXPGLVWDQFHRIFPEHWZHHQFRPSUHVVHGDLUDQGWUDQVFHLYHU
1.
2.
3.
First of all clean surfaces of the unit with compressed air.
Continue cleaning with a soft brush or a duster.
Clean heavily contaminated surfaces, especially grease stains, with a soft, lint-free cloth
moistened with suds.
5HWRXFKLQJWKH3DLQW:RUN
Touch up the paint work of the M3SR Transceiver as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove any loose paint particles from the area to be retouched.
Clean area to be retouched with a soft, lint-free cloth soaked in suds or similar.
Wait for the suds to dry out.
Retouch with paint carefully and allow plenty of time to dry out.
Once the first coat is completely dry, apply a second coat and again allow it to dry. The
repair is thus completed.
â 5.2 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
7HFKQLFDO ,QIRUPDWLRQ
1RWH
)RUXVHRIWKH065 7UDQVFHLYHUUHDGLQJWKLVDSSHQGL[LVQRWHVVHQWLDO7KLVDSSHQGL[SUR
YLGHVLQIRUPDWLRQIRUDQ\RQHLQWHUHVWHGLQWKHWHFKQLFDOIDFWV
DQGILJXUHVRI; $RU; $
The technical information covers the following:
External Interfaces
Connection of Peripheral Equipment
Default Settings
Inventory Structure
Technical Data for M3SR Transceiver
Remote Control
Download
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
([WHUQDO,QWHUIDFHV
(see Figs. A1.1 to A1.3)
More detailed information is provided by the interface description, available on demand from
Rohde & Schwarz at extra charge (order no.: 6102.4002.01SB).
* or ~ = inverted signal
$
6HUYLFH),//&RQQHFWRU; RQO\; $
1RWH
)RUIXWXUHXVH
$
),//&RQQHFWRU;
1RWH
1RWXVHG
â A1.2 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
/$16(59,&(&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Recessed socket,
8-way
;
(FT 4052.5738)
6LJQDO
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
PL_ETH_RX+
input
acc. to 10BaseT
PL_ETH_RX-
input
acc. to 10BaseT
PL_ETH_TX+
output
acc. to 10BaseT
not connected
not connected
PL_ETH_TX-
output
acc. to 10BaseT
not connected
not connected
Mating Connector:
8-way cable plug
(FT 6083.5984)
1RWH
;LVDQ0',; FURVVRYHU FRQQHFWRU
$
+HDGVHW&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Recessed socket,
7-way
;
(FO 586.7855)
6LJQDO
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
output
Headphones
Headphones (-)
Microphone 0.5 mV
Microphone 0.5 mV (-)
Microphone 150 mV
input
*PTT
input
GND
return to GND
input
return to GND
for microphone 150 mV
and *PTT
Mating Connector:
7-way cable plug
(FO 0586.8239)
Shrink-on part
(FO 0586.8245)
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.3 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
5HIHUHQFH)UHTXHQF\,QSXW&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
Recessed socket,
type BNC
;
&RQWDFW
6LJQDO
F_REF_IN
GND
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
input
(FJ 0048.6796)
Mating Connector:
Cable plug system BNC
(FJ 0272.5930)
$
5HIHUHQFH)UHTXHQF\2XWSXW&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
Recessed socket,
type BNC
;
&RQWDFW
6LJQDO
F_REF_OUT
GND
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
output
(FJ 0048.6796)
Mating Connector:
Cable plug system BNC
(FJ 0272.5930)
â A1.4 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
/$1&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Recessed socket,
8-way
;
(FT 0048.9620)
8-way cable plug
(FT 6083.5984)
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
PL_ETH_TX+
output
acc. to 10BaseT
PL_ETH_TX-
output
acc. to 10BaseT
PL_ETH_RX+
input
acc. to 10BaseT
not connected
not connected
Mating Connector:
6LJQDO
PL_ETH_RX-
input
acc. to 10BaseT
not connected
not connected
1RWH
;LVDQ0',FRQQHFWRU
$
0LVFHOODQHRXV&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Male multipoint connector, subminiature,
15-way
RELAY_1
output
RELAY_2
output
;
RELAY_3
output
RELAY_4
output
USER_I/O_0
USER_I/O_1
USER_I/O_2
GND
USER_I/O_3
Mating Connector:
10
USER_I/O_4
15-way female multipoint
connector
(FM 1003.0866)
Socket contacts
(FM 1006.7410)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
11
USER_I/O_5
12
USER_I/O_6
13
USER_I/O_7
14
GND
15
USER_I/O_8
(FM 6104.9018)
6LJQDO
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
1RWH
8VHU,2IRUFXVWRPHUVSHFLILFVROXWLRQV1RWVXSSRUWHGE\VRIWZDUH IRUIXWXUHXVH 5HOD\FRQ
WDFWVIRUFRQWURORIH[WHUQDO5)UHOD\V
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.5 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
56&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Female multipoint
connector, 9-way
;
(FM 6104.9018)
6LJQDO
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
RS 232_DCD
output
data carrier detect
RS 232_RXD
output
receive data
RS 232_TXD
input
transmit data
RS 232_DTR
input
data terminal ready
GND
RS 232_DSR
output
data set ready
RS 232_RTS
input
ready to send
RS 232_CTS
output
clear to send
RS 232_RI
output
ring indicator
Mating Connector:
9-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 0048.3368)
Pin contacts
(FM 0520.6344)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
1RWH
1RWXVHGLQWKLVDSSOLFDWLRQ
,QWHUIDFHIRUXVHUGDWDHJWRFRQQHFWD'7( GDWDWHUPLQDOHTXLSPHQW
â A1.6 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
0LVFHOODQHRXV&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Male multipoint connector, subminiature,
15-way
TOD_A
bidirec.
time of day *)
TOD_B
bidirec.
time of day *)
TOD
CONFIGURATION
output
reference voltage *)
NOGO
output
~ZEROIZE
input
~INHIBIT_TX
input
~INHIBIT_RX
input
GND
~SOK_1
bidirec.
synchronization ok *)
10
~Bl_1
bidirec.
break-in *)
Mating Connector:
11
~SOK_2
output
synchronization ok *)
15-way female multipoint
connector
(FM 1003.0866)
Socket contacts
(FM 1006.7410)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
12
~Bl_2
output
break-in *)
13
~NE_2
output
net entry *)
14
GND
15
~NE_1
bidirec.
net entry *)
;
(FM 6104.8986)
*)
6LJQDO
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
Used in conjunction with EPM radio modes (e.g. SECOS). Not used in this application.
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.7 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
56 &RQQHFWRU;
1RWH
7KHUHPRWHFRQWUROSRUWFDQEHFRQILJXUHGLQ0HQX 5$',2&21752/3257
HJWRVHULDOSRUWVWDQGDUG7KLVUHVXOWVLQWKHIROORZLQJFRQWDFWDVVLJQPHQWV
$ 5656
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Female multipoint
connector, subminiature, 15-way
GND
RS485_B_A
input
clear to send
RS485_S_A
bidirec.
clock
RS485_I_A
input
data set ready
RS485_R_A
input
receive data
RS485_C_A
output
request to send
RS485_T_A
output
transmit data
GND
RS485_5V
output
10
RS485_B_B
input
clear to send
11
RS485_S_B
bidirec.
clock
12
RS485_I_B
input
data set ready
13
RS485_R_B
input
receive data
14
RS 485_C_B
output
request to send
15
RS485_T_B
output
transmit data
;
(FM 6104.8986)
Mating Connector:
15-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 1006.4491)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
6LJQDO
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
signal ground
protective ground connected to chassis ground
$ 56
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
6LJQDO
GND
CTS
'LUHFWLRQ
signal ground
input
RxD
input
receive data
RTS
output
request to send
TxD
output
transmit data
GND
9 to 15
â A1.8 â
clear to send
not used
3 to 4
see appendix
A1.1.11.1
5HPDUNV
protective ground connected to chassis ground
not used
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
$),QWHUIDFH&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
6LJQDO
'LUHFWLRQ
Male multipoint connector, subminiature,
26-way
AF_TX2_NB_A
input
narrowband
galvanic decoupling
AF_TX2_NB_B
input
narrowband
galvanic decoupling
;
AF_RX2_NB_A
output
narrowband
galvanic decoupling
AF_RX2_NB_B
output
narrowband
galvanic decoupling
AGND
AF_TX2_WB_A
input
wideband
AF_TX2_WB_B
input
wideband
AF_RX2_WB_A
output
wideband
AF_RX2_WB_B
output
wideband
10
~PTT_LINE_2
input
for second receiver *)
11
AGC_RX2_1
output
for second receiver *)
12
AGC_RX2_2
output
for second receiver *)
13
SQ_MAIN_2
output
14
GND
(FM 6102.5650)
analog ground
15
Mating Connector:
26-way female multipoint
connector
(FM 1006.7403)
Socket contacts
(FM 1006.7410)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9564)
*)
5HPDUNV
reserved
16
USER_DEF_1
bidirec.
customer specific *)
17
USER_DEF_2
bidirec.
customer specific *)
18
PTT_2
input
19
SQ_GUARD_2
output
20
~CARRIER
output
21
~LINK11
output
22
+5V
output
23 to 24
for second receiver *)
reserved
25
USER_DEF_3
bidirec.
customer specific *)
26
USER_DEF_4
bidirec.
customer specific *)
for future use
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.9 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
$),QWHUIDFH&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
'LUHFWLRQ
input
narrowband
galvanic decoupling
AF_TX1_NB_B
input
narrowband
galvanic decoupling
AF_RX1_NB_A
output
narrowband
galvanic decoupling
AF_RX1_NB_B
output
narrowband
galvanic decoupling
AGND
AF_TX1_WB_A
input
wideband
AF_TX1_WB_B
input
wideband
AF_RX1_WB_A
output
wideband
AF_RX1_WB_B
output
wideband
10
~PTT_LINE_1
input
11
AGC_RX1_1
output
12
AGC_RX1_2
output
13
SQ_MAIN_1
output
(FM 6102.5650)
5HPDUNV
AF_TX1_NB_A
Female multipoint
connector, subminiature, 26-way
;
6LJQDO
analog ground
14 to 15 GND
16
BB/~DP
output
baseband / diphase
17
~DPTT
output
delayed
18
PTT_1
input
19
SQ_GUARD_1
output
20
~CARRIER
output
reserved
21
Mating Connector:
26-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 6104.9530)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9564)
â A1.10 â
22
+28 V_SW
output
switched
23
+28 V_SW
output
switched
24
ZEROIZE
output
25
PT/CT
output
plain text / cipher text
26
CGC
input
cipher ground control
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
)LOWHU3RZHU$PSOLILHU&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Female multipoint
connector, subminiature, 44-way
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
;
(FM 6104.9001)
Mating Connector:
44-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 6104.9547)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
(FM 0627.1826)
6076.0822.12.01
6LJQDO
28V_SW
GND
~BLK
~TX_INHIBIT0
~CARRIER
~FM
~TX_RX
TEST1
VHF
100KHZ
1MHZ
800KHZ
8MHZ
40MHZ
GND
28V_SW
GND
~3DB
~ENABLE0
~VSWR
~PTT
~TX_INHIBIT1
~CARRIER
~FM
25KHZ
200KHZ
2MHZ
10MHZ
100MHZ
80MHZ
28V_SW
GND
UHF
~TX_RX
TEST0
~ENABLE1
~VSWR
~PTT
GND
50KHZ
400KHZ
4MHZ
20MHZ
200MHZ0
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
output
switched
output
input
input
output
output
input
output
output
output
output
output
output
blanking
output
switched
output
input
input
output
input
input
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
attenuation
switched
output
output
input
input
input
output
output
output
output
output
output
used as âdevice selectâ
for certain filter types
â A1.11 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
)LOWHU3RZHU$PSOLILHU&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Female multipoint
connector, subminiature, 44-way
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
;
(FM 6104.9001)
Mating Connector:
44-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 6104.9547)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
(FM 0627.1826)
â A1.12 â
6LJQDO
28V_SW
GND
~BLK
~TX_INHIBIT2
~CARRIER
~FM
~TX_RX
TEST1
VHF
100KHZ
1MHZ
800KHZ
8MHZ
40MHZ
GND
28V_SW
GND
~3DB
~ENABLE0
~VSWR
~PTT
~TX_INHIBIT3
~CARRIER
~FM
25KHZ
200KHZ
2MHZ
10MHZ
100MHZ
80MHZ
28V_SW
GND
UHF
~TX_RX
TEST0
~ENABLE1
~VSWR
~PTT
GND
50KHZ
400KHZ
4MHZ
20MHZ
200MHZ1
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
output
switched
output
input
input
output
output
input
output
output
output
output
output
output
blanking
output
switched
output
input
input
output
input
input
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
attenuation
switched
output
output
input
input
input
output
output
output
output
output
output
used as âdevice selectâ
for certain filter types
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
$QWHQQD&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Recessed socket,
N-type
;
6LJQDO
Antenna
GND
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
RF Rx input / Tx output
(FJ 6104.9353)
Mating Connector:
Cable plug system N
(FJ 0087.8850)
$
'&,1&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Multipoint connector
7-way: 2 high-current
(40 A) pins + 5 auxil- A1
iary pins
A2
;
(FM 6105.0337)
6LJQDO
MAIN
'LUHFWLRQ
input
5HPDUNV
28 VDC nominal
GND
PFAIL
input
PTEMP
input
PRET
input
SPARE
SPARE
100 ⌠to GND
$
Mating Connector:
5-way female
multipoint connector
(FM 0066.0173)
Socket contacts
(FM 0520.6338)
High-current socket contacts
(FP 0531.9233)
Shielded case
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.13 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
%DWWHU\&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
Multipoint connector
3-way: 2 high-current
A1
(40 A) pins
A2
A3
;
6LJQDO
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
GND
SPARE
BATTERY
input
19 to 31 VDC
(FM 0070.0780)
$
Mating Connector:
3-way female multipoint
connector
(FM 0070.0800)
High-current contacts
(FP 0531.9233)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9564)
$
([WHUQDO6XSSO\&RQQHFWRU;
&RQQHFWRU
Female multipoint
connector, 9-way
;
(FM 0243.1346)
&RQWDFW
6LJQDO
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
output
28V_EXT
GND
ON
GND
28V_EXT_SW
output
28V_EXT
output
OFF
input
28V_EXT_SW
output
switched
28V_EXT_SW
output
switched
input
switched
Mating Connector:
9-way multipoint
connector
(FM 0048.3368)
Pin contacts
(FM 0520.6344)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
â A1.14 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
5[$QWHQQD&RQQHFWRU; 3DUWRI$QWHQQD,QWHUIDFH*,
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
6LJQDO
Recessed socket,
type BNC
Antenna Rx
;
GND
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
input
(part of W2:
DV 6103.4864)
Mating Connector:
Cable plug system BNC
(FJ 0272.5930)
$
*5[$QWHQQD&RQQHFWRU; 3DUWRI$QWHQQD,QWHUIDFH
*,0RG
&RQQHFWRU
&RQWDFW
6LJQDO
Recessed socket,
type BNC
Antenna GRx
;
GND
'LUHFWLRQ
5HPDUNV
input
(part of W1:
DV 6103.4858)
Mating Connector:
Cable plug system BNC
(FJ 0272.5930)
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.15 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
&RQQHFWLRQRI3HULSKHUDO(TXLSPHQW
$
8+)3RZHU$PSOLILHU9'/
When frequencies outside the frequency range of 225 to 400 MHz or communication mode
LINK 11, UHF Power Amplifier VD 480L will be bypassed.
The following CBIT messages relating to UHF Amplifier VD 480L may occur:
601: IF CBIT OF EXT AMP
602: IF VSWR OF EXT AMP
M3SR Transceiver
28V_SW
GND
~BLK
~TX_INHIBIT0
~CARRIER
~FM
GND
~3DB
~ENABLE0
~VSWR
~PTT
UHF
~TX/RX
TEST0
to Antenna
VD 480L
X30
X107
X27
X105
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
.33
.34
.35
.25
.2
.24
.22
.19
.4
.15
.12
.10
.7
.5
.11
.9
.18
X108
X106
8MHZ
40MHZ
GND
2MHZ
10MHZ
100MHZ
80MHZ
4MHZ
20MHZ
200MHZ
.13
.14
.15
.27
.28
.29
.30
.42
.43
.44
.6
.14
.10
.4
.12
.7
.15
.5
.13
.8
Make sure that in UHF Power Amplifier VD 480L the jumpers for connector X400 are set as
follows (see also User Manual 6045.5822.12), otherwise an error message may come up:
 X400.1 and .2: jumper (voltage error)
 X400.3 and .4: no jumper (no input power monitoring)
 X400.5 and .6: jumper (VSWR error)
When selecting the power level, bear in mind that VD 480L can be driven with max. 25 W.
â A1.16 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
1.
17.
Press softkey
to e.g.
Press softkey
Menu 400 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
2.
ENTER maintenance PIN by using
the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
deactivate the power level setting
(LOW).
18.
Press softkey
19.
Select power level MED by using the
tuning knob, then press ENTER.
Menu 510 (RADIO MODULES)
20.
Press softkey
4.
Press softkey
21.
5.
Select module VU POWER
AMPLIFIER by using the tunig knob.
Enter a new power level, e.g. 2 W, by
using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
22.
Press softkey
23.
Enter a new power level, e.g. 10 W,
by using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
24.
Press softkey
3.
6.
Press softkeys
Press softkey
Menu 516 (VU TX PARAMETERS)
7.
Press softkey
8.
Select UHF Power Amplifier VD 480L
by using the tuning knob, then press
ENTER.
9.
Press softkey
10.
Select UHF Power Amplifier VD 480L
by using the tuning knob, then press
ENTER.
11.
Press softkey
12.
Select power level LOW by using the
tuning knob, then press ENTER.
13.
Press softkey
14.
Enter a new power level, e.g. 1 W, by
using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
15.
Press softkey
16.
Enter a new power level, e.g. 5 W, by
using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
6076.0822.12.01
to e.g.
deactivate the power level setting
(MED).
25.
Press softkey
26.
Select power level HIGH by using the
tuning knob, then press ENTER.
27.
Press softkey
28.
Enter a new power level, e.g. 12 W,
by using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER
29.
Press softkey
30.
Enter a new power level, e.g. 15 W,
by using the numerical keypad, then
press ENTER.
31.
Press softkey
to e.g.
activate the power level setting
(HIGH).
â A1.17 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
Since the power amplifier is deactivated (PA UHF
= OFF), the default values are used for PTT instead of the values configured for AM or FM.
Default values:
AM = 3 W
FM = 5 W
Since the power amplifier is deactivated (PA UHF
= OFF), the default values are used for PTT instead of the values configured for AM or FM.
Default values:
AM = 10 W
FM = 10 W
Since the power amplifier is activated (PA UHF =
ON), the configured values are used for PTT instead of the default values.
Configured values:
AM = 12 W â 12 W x gain of VD 480L
FM = 15 W â 15 W x gain of VD 480L
â A1.18 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
8+)$JLOH)LOWHU)'
The UHF Agile Filter FD 430 can be used in all communication modes.
Only frequencies from the frequency range 225 to 400 MHz are permitted to be used.
Softkey PA UHF has no function, because FD 430 is active always and cannot be bypassed.
M3SR Transceiver
28V_SW
GND
~FM
100KHZ
1MHZ
800KHZ
8MHZ
40MHZ
GND
28V_SW
GND
~PTT
25KHZ
200KHZ
2MHZ
10MHZ
100MHZ
80MHZ
28V_SW
GND
GND
50KHZ
400KHZ
4MHZ
20MHZ
200MHZ
to Antenna
FD 430
X30
X5
X27
X1
.1
.2
.6
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.21
.25
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
.32
.39
.40
.41
.42
.43
.44
.1
.3
.29
.30
.13
.33
.16
.36
.4
.2
.5
.26
.11
.31
.14
.34
.17
.37
.20
.19
.25
.12
.32
.15
.35
.18
X2
When selecting the power level, bear in mind that UHF Agile Filter FD 430 can be driven with
max. 10 W (AM) or 15 W (FM).
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.19 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
Starting point: Menu 040 (MAIN)
1.
Menu 400 (RADIO MAINTENANCE)
2.
ENTER maintenance PIN by using
the numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
3.
15.
Press softkey
16.
Enter a new power level by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
17.
Press softkey
18.
Select power level MED by using the
tuning knob, then press ENTER.
19.
Press softkey
20.
Enter a new power level by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
21.
Press softkey
22.
Enter a new power level by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
23.
Press softkey
24.
Select power level HIGH by using the
tuning knob, then press ENTER.
25.
Press softkey
26.
Enter a new power level by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
Press softkey
Press softkeys
Menu 510 (RADIO MODULES)
4.
Press softkey
5.
Select module VU POWER
AMPLIFIER by using the tuning knob.
6.
Press softkey
Menu 516 (VU TX PARAMETERS)
7.
Press softkey
8.
Select UHF Agile Filter FD 430 by using the tuning knob, then press
ENTER.
9.
Press softkey
10.
Select UHF Agile Filter FD 430 by using the tuning knob, then press
ENTER.
11.
Press softkey
12.
Select power level LOW by using the
tuning knob, then press ENTER.
27.
Press softkey
13.
Press softkey
28.
Enter a new power level by using the
numerical keypad, then press ENTER.
14.
Enter a new power level by using the
numerical keypad, then press
ENTER.
â A1.20 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
8+)$XWRPDWLF)LOWHU)'
UHF Filter FD 221 can be used in all communication modes.
Only frequencies from the frequency range between 225 and 400 MHz are permitted to be
used.
Filter tuning is monitored by signal ~Tx_INHIBIT0 (contact X27.4). As long as filter tuning is in
progress, the transmitter is disabled. If tuning fails to be completed within approximately 20 s,
the message " 603: EXT PA TUNING X27" comes up.
No setup procedures are required in the M3SR Transceiver.
28V_SW
GND
~TX_INHIBIT0
100KHZ
1MHZ
800KHZ
8MHZ
40MHZ
GND
28V_SW
GND
25KHZ
200KHZ
2MHZ
10MHZ
100MHZ
80MHZ
28V_SW
GND
50KHZ
400KHZ
4MHZ
20MHZ
200MHZ
6076.0822.12.01
to Antenna
FD 221
M3SR Transceiver
X30
X10
X27
X1
.1
.2
.4
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.25
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
.32
.40
.41
.42
.43
.44
.31
.34
.18
.3
.7
.6
.10
.13
.35
.32
.36
.1
.4
.8
.11
.15
.14
.33
.19
.2
.5
.9
.12
.16
X20
â A1.21 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
'HIDXOW6HWWLQJV
There are two different scenarios for default settings to become active:
The radio is powered up for the first time.
The radio is reset during operation by using softkey DEFAULT SETTINGS in Menu 400.
In this case only the maintenance parameters will be reset, all other parameters are not
affected. In the tables below, such parameters non-affected by a reset are marked by an
"N" in the last column.
Frequency
310 MHz (UHF and VHF/UHF)
Mode
FIX.FRQ
Guard
OFF
Power
HIGH
Modulation
AM
Squelch
ON
Marker
OFF
H-Duplex
H-Duplex RX
H-Duplex TX
OFF
310 MHz (UHF and VHF/UHF)
311 MHz (UHF and VHF/UHF)
Clipper
OFF
COMM
V/D UNCPH
Chan SP
25 kHz
Tx Offs
OFF
AF AGC
OFF
Preset No.
Band
UHF
Radio Time
Date
00:00
01.01.70
Default Address Radio
Logical 46
IP 192.168.052.046 T R
Radio Modules
Slot 0 VU GRX, ALL
Slot 3 VU SYN, CL1
Slot 4 VU RX, CL1
Slot 17 VU TX, CL1
Slot 18 PLAT, ALL
Slot 19 AFI, CL1
Slot 20 PLAT INT, ALL
Operation type
Manual
Remote Control RS485 (X24)
9 600, 7, 1, ODD, RS485, S400U protocol
â A1.22 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
Module Parameters CPLAT:
RX
SQ Level S/N
10 dB
Input
RXTX or RX
1RWH
,QFRQMXQFWLRQZLWK$QWHQQD,QWHU
IDFH*, DQGZLWKRXW8+)
)LOWHU)' VHOHFW5;LQDOO
RWKHUFDVHV5;7;LQSXW
TX
SY
(Parameters
for AFI)
Plat
AFI
Split Site
6076.0822.12.02
Clipper Level
90%
Sensitivity
LN
Attack
10 ms
Decay
100 ms
AM TX Power
3, 10, 30
FM TX Power
5, 10, 45
AM MOD
90%
Voltage Protection
ON
External Power Amplifier
None
External Filter
None
TX Deviation WB
6.3 kHz
TX Deviation NB
3.5 kHz
TX Deviation L11
20 kHz
TX Deviation TRIM
0%
VCXO
2 047
TCXO
2 047
OCXO
32 767
Ref Out
10 MHz
EXT REF
OFF
REF IN INPUT
OFF
PWR SUP
MAIN
CLK SRC
OCXO (if unavailable: TCXO)
TX ALC
ON
RX LEVEL
0 dBm
TX LEVEL
0 dBm
TX ALC Attack
30 ms
TX ALC Decay
300 ms
TX ALC Level
0 dB
Marker Volume
-1.5 dB
Guard Volume
0 dB
Sidetone Volume
-6 dB
Simple
â A1.23 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
Standby
not selectable
PTT Mapping
PTT1
low
PTT1L
low
PTT2
high
PTT2L
low
CL1
Rem
CL1
CL1
Rem
CL1
Phantom Mapping
not selectable
Audio Mapping
WB1 none
NB1 to CL1
WB2 to CL1
NB2 none
Device Mapping
All none, no CL assigned
SQ Polarity
All low
Audio Source Source
1 = CL1
2 = Guard U/V
Marker Control
Disabled
Local Mode
OFF
PINs
All PINs set to 00000
Default values for Setup:
Active Preset
Preset Count
No. of Pages
200
Default values for Control Unit GB 4000C
Default Address Control Unit
Logical 47
IP 192.168.052.047 T C
Contrast
100%
Brightness
100%
Display Timer
60 min
Indicators
100%
Key Illumination
100%
Frequency
ICAO
Date Format
YYYY / MM / DD
â A1.24 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
,QYHQWRU\6WUXFWXUH
In Menu 415 INVENTORY all components installed in the radio are listed:
e.g. XT4410A (DEV)
DS 4400A PACK (SWM)
PLATFORM (SW)
BOOTPROG (FW)
KR 4400 BASIS (HWM)
PLATFORM (HW)
FRONT PANEL B (HW)
DSP MODULE (HW)
CPLD KR 4400 (FW)
ACPCB ws EQI (FW)
DSP KR 4400 (FW)
DSP CPLD (FW)
ET 4400 REC (HWM)
RECEIVER B (HW)
FLASH ET 4400 (FW)
ET 4400G REC (HWM)
GUARD REC B (HW)
FLASH ET 4400G (FW)
GF 4400T SYNTH (HWM)
SYNTHESIZER B (HW)
VCO BOARD (HW)
XIL GF 4400T (FW)
ALT GF 4400T (FW)
VT 4403 TRANSM (HWM)
TRANSMITTER B (HW)
DRIVER AMP (HW)
POWER SUPPLY (HW)
DSP VT 4403 (FW)
DSP CPLD (FW)
FD 4430 UHF (HWM)
FW XILINX (FW)
HF BOARD (HW)
DIGITAL BOARD
In Menu 815 INVENTORY all components installed in the control unit are listed:
GB 4000C CONTR (HVM)
CONTROLLER B (HW)
FRONT PANEL B (HW)
ACPCB ws EQI (FW)
CONTR GB 4000C (SW)
BOOTPR GB 4000C (FW)
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.25 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
7HFKQLFDO'DWD
See data sheet for Digital Programmable Software Radios of Series M3SR in the annex.
â A1.26 â
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
5HPRWH&RQWURO
For remote control of the M3SR Transceiver two different serial connections may be used:
*)
6HULDO
&RQQHFWLRQ
6HULDO3RUW
6WDQGDUG
3URWRFRO
1RWH
X6 / X20
LAN
GB2PP
Multipoint connection
(TCP IP addressing)
X24 *)
RS232
RS422
GB2PP
Point-to-point connection
RS232
RS422
S400U
Point-to-point connection
RS485
S400U
Multipoint connection
(with CSMA/CD)
The protocol and the serial port standard for the serial connection X24 can be configured
via Menu 425 (SERIAL CONTROL INTERFACE).
The following table shows the difference between the protocols:
68
*%33
Manual
;(only FF)
Preset
;(only FF)
Emergency
;(only FF)
Radio maintenance
Preset Page setup
CBIT status
Start of IBIT
Session control
Operation mode:
â˘
â˘
â˘
Error List:
â˘
â˘
x = supported
6076.0822.12.01
Read
Clear
FF = fixed frequency
â A1.27 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
5HPRWH&RQWUROYLD56&RQQHFWRU;DQG*%333URWRFRO
Radio Interface Unit is in Advanced session and controls
the radio.
Remote Control Unit
GB 4000C,
mod. 03
Control unit is in Monitoring
session.
Advanced / Fixed session is
possible.
Radio
Interface
Unit
e.g. RS232
GB2PP Protocol
LAN
GB2PP Protocol
;
;
Control unit is in Monitoring session.
Advanced / Fixed session and local
mode are possible.
Radio interface unit controls
the M3SR Transceiver in
Advanced session.
The Radio Interface Unit (RIU) uses the GB2PP protocol to control the radio. When the RIU
has connected to the radio in an Advanced session, all other control units may take control of
the radio any time. For this to happen, only the session needs to be changed from Monitoring
to Advanced or Fixed. Menu 020 (COMLINE SESSION) contains an indication that the radio is
being controlled by an RIU (ADR = 999) in Advanced session.
â A1.28 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
5HPRWH&RQWUROYLD56&RQQHFWRU;DQG683URWRFRO
only Monitoring
session
Remote Control Unit GB 406
LAN
GB2PP Protocol
only Fixed
session
Customerspecific
Device
only Fixed
session
;
;
;
;
;
;
RS485
S400U Protocol
DSSOLFDWLRQSURWRFRO
SUHYHQWVFROOLVLRQV
LAN Hub
only Monitoring session or
local mode
only Monitoring session
Remote Control Unit
GB 4000C,
mod. 03
Control Unit GB 406 controls
the M3SR Transceiver in
Fixed session
As soon as a radio address has been configured on one of the Control Units GB 406, this control unit will automatically connect to the radio in Fixed session. All other control units will only
be able to monitor. Menu 020 (COMLINE SESSION) contains an indication that the S400U protocol is being used for radio control (ADR = 400U).
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.29 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
$
'RZQORDG
6RIWZDUH'RZQORDG
A software CD is delivered together with each radio. The software CD contains the complete Software Package. The Software Package itself consists of various software and
firmware items. The following table (example for fullband transceiver = XT) shows which
software and firmware items are upgradable.
7\SH
1DPH
,GHQW1R
9HUVLRQ
8SJUDG
DEOH
SWM
DS4400A Pack
SW
PLATFORM
FW
FW
FW
FW
FW
FW
FW
FW
FW
FW
FW
SW
FW
FW
FW
BOOTPROG
CPLD KR4400
ACPCB ws EQI
DSP KR4400
DSP CPLD
FLASH ET4400
FLASH ET4400G
XIL GF4400T
ALT GF4400T
DSP VT4403
DSP CPLD
CONTR GB4000C
BOOTPR GB4000C
ACPCB ws EQI
FW XILINX
6102.2068.05
6102.2051.04
6103.6021.03
6103.6038.03
6102.5621.02
6102.5609.02
6105.6412.06
6102.5644.02
6105.8550.02
6102.7118.02
6102.8614.02
6102.6611.02
6102.6605.02
6102.7599.02
6105.8550.02
6103.6109.02
6105.6406.02
6105.6412.06
6103.2084.02
01.00
01.00
03.72
03.72
12.03
01.00
01.27
03.46
01.02
01.33
01.03
04.00
04.00
03.36
01.02
03.72
12.03
01.27
01.08
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
yes
no
5HPDUN
with Link 11
without Link 11
with Link 11
without Link 11
only X. 4410A
only X. 4410A
only X. 4410A
FD 4430
In addition, the software CD contains the Update32 and Service- and Maintenance Tool
ZS 4400 (basis edition) for upgrading the software, as well as a list of known software
bugs. The software CD can be reordered any time by stating the ident. no. of the
DS4400A Pack (e.g. 6102.2068.05).
The manufacturer provides tools to download these data. The download can be performed via LAN by using connectors X6 (front) and X20 (rear). The actual download tool
runs on any standard PC supporting Windows NT4⢠or Windows W2kâ˘.
For detailed information please contact the manufacturerâs representative in charge.
â A1.30 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
Update 32 Tool
The Update 32 Tool is contained on the software CD that is delivered with each
M3SR Transceiver. Downloading the software is done in a number of single steps.
Please follow the instructions in the Software Manual of the Update 32 Tool (ident. no.
6076.0168.42). It is also contained on the software CD. Another, more comfortable
means for upgrading is the Service and Maintenance Tool ZS 4400.
Service & Maintenance Tool ZS 4400 (ident. no. 6105.2600.02)
The Service & Maintenance Tool automatically compares the software and firmware
loaded in the M3SR Transceiver with that on the software CD. In the case that any difference is detected, the required upgrade is performed also automatically.
Please follow the instructions in the Software Manual of Service & Maintenance Tool
ZS 4400.
/RDGLQJWKH3UHVHW3DJHVLQWRWKH5DGLR
Control Unit GB 4000C
The Preset Pages can be entered manually via the following menus:
 620 (LOADED PRESET PAGES PARAMS) and
 710 (EDIT PRESET PAGE (FIX.FRQ).
Service & Maintenance Tool ZS 4400 (ident. no. 6105.2600.02)
The Service & Maintenance Tool can be used to retrieve from the radio (reference device) all Preset Pages that have been edited manually, to duplicate them in a second step
into other radios.
Please follow the instructions in the Software Manual of Service & Maintenance Tool
ZS 4400.
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.31 / A1.32 â
6076.0822.12.01
for future use
(X4)
not used
Mating Connector:
8-way cable plug
(FT 6083.5984)
(X6)
(X7)
â A1.33 / A1.34 â
Mating Connector:
7-way cable plug
(FO 0586.8239)
Shrink-on part
(FO 0586.8245)
)LJ $ ([WHUQDO,QWHUIDFHVRI; $ )URQW
(X5)
1RWH
0DWLQJFRQQHFWRUVDUHFRQWDLQHG
LQ&RQQHFWRU6HW=)
SDUWQR
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Mating Connector:
9-way multipoint
connector
(FM 0048.3368)
Pin contacts
(FM 0520.6344)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
Mating Connector:
3-way female multipoint
connector
(FM 0070.0800)
High-current contacts
(FP 0531.9233)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9564)
$
Mating Connector:
Cable plug system N
(FJ 0087.8850)
$
Mating Connector:
5-way female multipoint
connector
(FM 0066.0173)
Socket contacts
(FM 0520.6338)
High-current socket contacts
(FP 0531.9233)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9564)
Mating Connector:
44-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 6104.9547)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
(FM 0627.1826)
6076.0822.12.01
Mating Connector:
8-way cable plug
(FT 6083.5984)
Mating Connectors:
Cable plug system BNC
(FJ 0272.5930)
Mating Connector:
44-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 6104.9547)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
(FM 0627.1826)
1RWH
Mating Connector:
26-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 6104.9530)
Pin contacts
(FM 1006.4504)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9564)
â A1.35 / A1.36 â
Mating Connector:
26-way female
multipoint connector
(FM 1006.7403)
Socket contacts
(FM 1006.7410)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9564)
0DWLQJFRQQHFWRUVDUHFRQWDLQHG
LQ&RQQHFWRU6HW=)
SDUWQR
Mating Connector:
15-way female
multipoint connector
(FM 1003.0866)
Socket contacts
Mating Connector:
15-way female multipoint (FM 1006.7410)
Shielded case
connector
(FM 0586.9870)
(FM 1003.0866)
Socket contacts
(FM 1006.7410)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
)LJ $ ([WHUQDO,QWHUIDFHV 5HDU
Mating Connector:
15-way male multipoint
connector
(FM 1006.4491)
Pin contacts
Mating Connector:
(FM 1006.4504)
9-way male multipoint
Shielded case
connector
(FM 0586.9870)
(FM 0048.3368)
Pin contacts
(FM 0520.6344)
Shielded case
(FM 0586.9870)
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
6076.0822.12.01
â A1.37 / A1.38 â
*,0RG
RU
)LJ $ ([WHUQDO,QWHUIDFHV 5HDU0RGXOHV
*,0RG
Mating Connectors:
Cable plug system BNC
(FJ 0272.5930)
Operatorâs Manual ⢠Technical Information
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SR
Your key to interoperability
â High operational flexibility while on
mission
â Interoperability with existing radios
according to international standards
â Easy system integration
â Low life cycle costs
â Software download of new
waveforms
â High growth potential through P3I
(preplanned product improvement)
â Embedded hopping filter optionally
available
Radio Basis R&S KR4400
The various models are set up on the
hardware and software of the Radio Basis
R&S KR4400, which forms the central and
common part of all R&S M3SR radios. The
radio basis is independent of the RFspecific modules. Additional radiospecific hardware and software modules
define the performance features of the
radio.
The R&S M3SR (multiband, multimode
and multirole surface radio) represents an
innovative and versatile generation of
software radios for use in the navy, civil
and military air traffic control, air defence
and stationary applications.
In addition to the R&S M3TR (multiband,
multimode and multirole tactical radio)
and R&S M3AR (multiband, multimode
and multirole airborne radio), the R&S
M3SR is the third element of a new radio
equipment generation. All three feature
functionality that can be varied by means
of software.
municate with neighbouring troops, the
radio is switched to the waveform or
communication protocol used there. This
switchover can be carried out online even
during a mission.
The operational functions and the available waveforms are determined by the
loaded application software. Additional
functions can be implemented, as
required, by downloading the appropriate
software and/or using plug-in hardware
modules.
Modular design
For the commercial user, the basic units
come standard with the waveform for air
traffic control (ATC) in line with
EN300676. The R&S M3SR can be used
both in normal ATC operation and as an
emergency backup radio.
The R&S M3SR is interoperable with
many types of existing radio equipment
and standards. For military customers,
this means seamless communication
with their own and allied troops. To com-
The R&S M3SR features highly modular
hardware and software architecture. All
R&S M3SR units are based on the uniform Radio Basis R&S KR4400. The versatile P3I upgrade concept of the basic
version helps to avoid unnecessarily high
initial investment costs.
The R&S M3SR is available as a receiver,
transmitter or transceiver, according to
the customer's requirements.
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SR
The R&S KR4400 consists of the mechanical frame, the radio platform and a front
panel with audio interface, loudspeaker
and status displays. The platform is the
control center of the radio. The embedded
realtime operating system controls and
monitors all functions in the radio. A control panel (R&S GB4000C) can be integrated for local control of the radios.
The main tasks of the radio basis include:
â Monitoring and control of the
complete radio unit
â Mechanical and electrical accommodation of modules and control panel
â Digital voice and data processing
â Internal routing of information data
to the interfaces
â Standard interfaces to peripherals
â Audio interface, loading of encryption keys and display of status information
An oven-controlled crystal oscillator
(OCXO) is integrated as standard to meet
the stringent requirements regarding
time stability.
For the configuration of the various radio
models, the radio basis is equipped with
slots for the radio modules, and a
mechanical fixture on the side to accommodate the transmitter module.
Key features of the modules
The modules have the following outstanding features:
â Independent use of all modules
(no alignment or manual adjustment
when modules are replaced)
â Central download of software and
firmware (no need to open the
radio unit)
â Data exchange via radio module bus
â Type label with bar code identification
down to PCB level (fast automated
detection and identification)
â All modules with electromagnetic
shielding (maximum EMC/EMI
immunity)
â All settings made via software
(reduced maintenance)
â Fast and easy replacement of
modules (short MTTR)
VHF/UHF Receiver Module
R&S ET4400
The Main Receiver Module R&S ET4400
can be universally used for all operational
modes in the VHF/UHF range. The use of
programmable VLSI components makes
the module extremely compact, occupying only one slot. The flexible digital
demodulator allows the processing of
complex digital waveforms.
Electronic Protective Measures (EPM)
Processor Module R&S GP4400
The powerful EPM Processor Module R&S
GP4400 handles data processing for special waveforms. It occupies one radio module slot and can host EPM waveforms such
as SATURN, SECOS or HAVE QUICK I/II on
its memory devices. Its functionality is
determined by the loaded software.
VHF/UHF Guard Receiver
R&S ET4400G
The R&S ET4400G simultaneously monitors the emergency frequencies in the
VHF (121.5 MHz) and UHF (243 MHz)
ranges and can be installed in any R&S
M3SR model, irrespective of the other
modules. The AF of the guard receiver can
either be routed to one of the audio interfaces or mixed with the AF of the main
receiver. The software for using a guard
receiver is supplied with the basic unit.
Power modules
Modules for radio module slots
VHF/UHF Transmitter Module
R&S VT4403
The R&S VT4403 is a universal transmitter
module for all operational modes in the
frequency range 100 MHz to 512 MHz
and is mounted in the R&S KR4400. This
means that there is one transmitter for
each radio. A PIN diode switch is provided for fast and reliable switchover
between transmission and reception. Two
low-noise, temperature-controlled fans
are provided on the rear panel for heat
dissipation of the transmitter.
VHF/UHF Synthesizer Module
R&S GF4400T
The synthesizer module is the core of the
high-frequency structure of the radio
unit. It covers the frequency range from
100 MHz to 512 MHz, generates the RF
signal for driving the transmitter and supplies the local oscillator (LO) signal for the
receiver module. Direct digital synthesis
(DDS) technology ensures fine frequency
tuning with high accuracy and high
speed. The extremely low-noise signal
generation allows the radio to be used at
sites with stringent requirements regarding large-signal immunity (collocation).
Main Receiver Module R&S ET4400
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SR
3
Internal AC/DC Power Supply
R&S IN4400A
The R&S IN4400A is the internal AC/DC
power supply required for receiver and
multireceiver radio types. Its submodules
are an AC/DC converter and a DC/DC converter. The AC/DC converter delivers DC
from the external mains supply. The R&S
IN4400A occupies the slot assigned to
the transmitter module. The external
Universal Power Supply R&S IN4000A is
required for transceivers or transmitters.
Interfaces
In addition to the interfaces provided as
standard, interface cards can be inserted.
Six free slots are available for interface
cards. These cards may contain customerspecific interfaces as well as other functions.
Backplane R&S GH4400
The Backplane R&S GH4400 connects the
optional interface cards and the transmitter module to the radio module bus. This
passive PCB does not occupy a radio
module slot. The Backplane R&S GH4400
is required for every R&S M3SR configuration except receivers, which do not
need interface cards.
Local control panel
A local control panel can be integrated in
the front of the Radio Basis R&S KR4400.
If a local control panel is not required, a
blank panel is fitted instead.
Comfort Control Panel (CCP)
R&S GB4000C
The ½ 19" plug-in CCP is the standard
control panel and allows easy and convenient local control of the radio. All radio
functions are controlled by the R&S
GB4000C. The 5" display has softkeys and
a user-friendly, menu-guided user interface. The keypad is backlighted by LEDs.
Any additional R&S M3SR units that are
connected can be controlled and monitored from a local control panel.
Antenna connector configurations
The connector for a combined transmitting/receiving antenna is configured as
standard. Depending on the antennas
used, various connector combinations are
offered. This means that either separate
Backplane
Guard
receiver
EPM
processor
Synthesizer
RX
Radio modules
Interface cards
Power modules
TX
Standard I/O
Radio module bus (RMB)
Radio basis
or
Radio control and signal processing
Audio front panel with fill gun connector
Local
control
panel
incl. DC
power supply
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SR
AC/DC
power
supply
Block diagram of R&S M3SR
or combined antenna connectors are
available for main receiver, guard receiver
and transmitter.
Due to the use of a universal wideband
amplifier, only one antenna connector is
required, irrespective of the frequency
range. If separate operation of the VHF
and UHF range is required for special
applications, an external diplexer (e.g.
R&S FT224) has to be used.
Remote control
A variety of standardized interfaces is
available for remote control of the radio
units. An integrated LAN (local area network) hub allows easy integration into
data networks. Any number of radios can
thus be controlled from a central operator
position.
The R&S M3SR radios can be remote-controlled via external remote control units,
other R&S M3SR units with integrated
control panel, Rohde&Schwarz remote
control systems or customer-specific
solutions.
Built-in test (BIT) concept
Radio failure archive
An efficient BIT concept allows identification and location of functional failures
down to module level. All failures
detected during the test can be indicated
locally and remotely.
All failures detected and error messages
are stored in the radio failure archive. The
archive can be read locally on the CCP
and remotely. Each entry also contains a
description in plain text.
â Power-up BIT (PBIT)
Automatic test after power-up of the
unit
â Continuous BIT (CBIT)
Automatic start after successful PBIT
and continuous and automatic monitoring of all modules including radio
basis during operation
â Initiated BIT (IBIT)
Interactive test in non-operating
status to support maintenance of the
radio units; can be triggered locally or
remotely; test and analysis of the
signal path in the radio with the aid of
test signals without disconnecting the
antenna connector (test signal generator already built in; simplified diagnostics possible without opening the
unit)
Inventory report
The software and hardware states of the
radio system are entered in full detail into
the inventory report. The report allows a
fast overview of the total configuration
status without having to open the unit.
Power supply concept
Transceivers and transmitters are supplied from DC. The external Universal
Power Supply R&S IN4000A or other
AC/DC sources provide AC supply for the
radios.
Receivers and multireceivers have an
integrated AC/DC power supply
(R&S IN4400A).
Radio type Receiver
Transmitter
Transceiver
Power supply
DC
integrated
integrated
integrated
AC/DC
integrated
external R&S IN4000A
external R&S IN4000A
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SR
5
Specifications for basic fixed-frequency radio
FM noise quieting (with input signal
â70 dBm, fm = 1 kHz;
deviation = Âą3.5 kHz )
Common data for transmitter, transceiver and receiver radio
configurations
Selectivity (IF bandwidth)
Unless stated otherwise, specs are valid for the frequency range from 108 MHz
to 174 MHz and 225 MHz to 400 MHz. For the remaining ranges down to
100 MHz and up to 512 MHz, minor deviations may occur.
Main RX
BW 1 for 25 kHz channel spacing
BW 2 for 8.33 kHz channel spacing
BW 3 for data
BW 4 for data
Usable frequency range
Waveforms contained in
standard radio configuration
Optional waveforms
100 MHz to 512 MHz without gap
VHF (108 MHz to 173.975 MHz):
LOS FM
LOS AM
Civil ATC AM acc. to EN300676
UHF (225 MHz to 399.975 MHz):
LOS FM
LOS AM
â HAVE QUICK I/II acc. to STANAG4246
â SATURN acc. to STANAG4372
â UHF DAMA with external modem
acc. to MIL-STD-188-181/2/3 on
request
â Link 11 with external modem acc. to
STANAG5511
â Link 22 with external modem acc. to
STANAG5522 on request
â Link 4A with external modem acc. to
STANAG5504 on request
â Link Y Mk2 with external modem on
request
â SECOS voice, Rohde&Schwarz
TRANSEC/COMSEC waveform
â SECOS with data preprocessor (DPP)
â SECOS with TDMA on request
â other waveforms on request
8.33 kHz, 25 kHz, 75 kHz (HAVE QUICK
mode)
Frequency spacing
8.33 kHz, 12.5 kHz and 25 kHz synthesizer increments
Frequency drift (â20qC to +55qC)
0.1 ppm (10â7) with OCXO
Frequency offset (for TX only)
up to 4-carrier offset mode Âą2.5 kHz/
5 kHz/7.5 kHz
5-carrier offset mode on request
Classes of emission
200
AM: A3E, A9E, AXX (16 kbit/s baseband and diphase)
FM: F3E, F9E, FSK, FSK-MSK
Receiver data
Adjacent-channel rejection
Desensitization
S+N/N !10 dB, weighted to ITU-T
With FM (Âą3.5 kHz deviation)
dâ107 dBm (low-noise mode)
dâ101 dBm (low-distortion mode)
dâ110 dBm (low-noise mode)
dâ104 dBm (low-distortion mode)
For (S+N)/N = 10 dB (weighted to
ITU-T) and fm = 1 kHz
Note: If a guard receiver with common main receiver antenna is installed in an
R&S M3SR, the sensitivity of the main receiver is reduced by 4 dB.
AM internal noise level
(with input signal â47 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz, m = 0.3)
(S+N)/N t40 dB (modulated-tounmodulated), weighted to ITU-T
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SR
VHF ATC band acc. to EN300676
t60 dB for 8.33 kHz and 25 kHz channel
spacing
wanted signal â95 dBm/m = 0.6,
unwanted signal +80 dBc
VHF at !Âą200 kHz
UHF at !Âą200 kHz
IF/image rejection
t80 dB
Spurious rejection
80 dB
Suppression of 3rd order intermodulation products
Low-distortion mode, ref = â101 dBm,
m = 30%, 'f = 100 kHz
t70 dB
Local oscillator reradiation at antenna
connector
dâ90 dBm
Squelch
(S+N)/N setting range
6 dB to 20 dB
Squelch hysteresis
1.5 dB to 6 dB
Squelch attenuation (muting) (AF output with activated squelch threshold) dâ70 dBm
AF outputs (voice) (valid for A3E and F3E in plain and fixed-frequency mode)
Line output
Impedance
Level with input signal â47 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz, m = 0.6 or 'f = 3.5 kHz
AF response
With 25 kHz channel spacing and
input signal â47 dBm, m = 0.3
With 8.33 kHz channel spacing and
input signal â47 dBm, m = 0.3
Sensitivity
With AM (m = 0.3)
t26 kHz/6 dB, d50 kHz/80 dB
t7 kHz/6 dB, d13 kHz/60 dB
t50 kHz/6 dB, d150 kHz/70 dB
t70 kHz/6 dB, d140 kHz/60 dB
RFI (radio frequency interference) suppression
Channel spacing
Preset pages (channel configuration,
including all operational parameters)
(S+N)/N t40 dB, weighted to ITU-T
600 : Âą10%
0 dBm nominal (â20 dBm to +10 dBm
settable) into 600 :, balanced (floating) allowing external grounding;
500 V minimum isolation against
ground
300 Hz to 3500 Hz with Âą2 dB
d150 Hz with dâ15 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
t5000 Hz with dâ20 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
300 Hz to 3000 Hz with Âą2 dB
d150 Hz with dâ15 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
t4000 Hz with dâ20 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
THD (total harmonic distortion)
(with input signal â79 dBm to +3 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz and 600 : termination)
With m = 0.6
d5%
With m = 0.9
d10%
Noise peak limiter threshold range
m = 0.3 to 0.9 adjustable
AF AGC with input variation
m = 0.3 to 0.9
d1 dB AF output variation
AF outputs (WB) (valid for A9E and F9E in plain and fixed-frequency mode)
Line output
Impedance
600 : Âą10%
Level with input signal â47 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz, m = 0.9 or Âą6.25 kHz FM
deviation
1.4 V peak-peak nominal
(1 V to 8 V peak-peak settable) into
600 : unbalanced
AF response
With input signal â47 dBm, m = 0.9
30 Hz to 12000 Hz with Âą2 dB
25000 Hz with dâ10 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
Extended frequency range on request 30 Hz to 16000 Hz with Âą2 dB
THD (with input signal â79 dBm to
+3 dBm, m = 0.9, fm = 1 kHz and 600 :
termination)
d10%
AF outputs (data) (valid for ASK and FSK/MSK)
Data rate
max. 32 kbit/s, higher data rates on
request
16 kbit/s baseband or diphase
m = 0.9; 'F = Âą6.25 kHz
AM modulation depth tolerance with
specified input level at AF inputs
FM frequency deviation
Voice
WB/data
For values with guard receiver
installed, see page 9.
configurable acc. to the mode used;
examples
3.5 kHz
6.25 kHz
AF inputs (NB voice) (valid for A3E and F3E in plain and fixed-frequency mode)
Nominal input level voice audio
0 dBm
AF line input voice
â15 dBm to +10 dBm settable, into
600 : Âą10% balanced; transformers
with center tap for phantom circuit;
500 V minimum isolation against
ground
AF response
With 25 kHz channel spacing and
nominal input signal
With 8.33 kHz channel spacing and
nominal input signal
RF AGC
With modulated input signals AM
(m = 0.6) or FM (Âą4.66 kHz deviation)
â107 dBm to +1 dBm (LN mode) or
â101 dBm to +7 dBm (LD mode)
d3 dB AF output variation
80% to 98%
300 Hz to 3500 Hz with Âą2 dB
d100 Hz with dâ20 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
t5000 Hz with dâ25 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
300 Hz to 2500 Hz with Âą2 dB
d100 Hz with dâ20 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
t3200 Hz with dâ25 dB (fref = 1 kHz)
AF inputs (WB)
Nominal input level wideband
1.4 V peak-peak
AF line input WB/data
1 V to 8 V peak-peak adjustable,
into 600 : Âą10%
Transmitter data
AF response (valid for A9E)
With nominal input signal
30 Hz to 12000 Hz with Âą2 dB
Extended frequency range on request 30 Hz to 16000 Hz with Âą2 dB
Unless stated otherwise, specs refer to the antenna terminal and involve an
antenna impedance of 50 : (max. VSWR = 1.1 and nominal power supply).
AF response (valid for F9E)
With nominal input signal
300 Hz to 12000 Hz with Âą2 dB
Extended frequency range on request 300 Hz to 16000 Hz with Âą2 dB
Output power
AF inputs (data) (valid for ASK and FSK/MSK)
AM carrier power
30 W nominal, 1 W to 30 W adjustable
FM/FSK
100 W nominal, 1 W to 100 W adjustable
Power setting
quasi-continuously and independently
for AM and FM
Power reduction
for VSWR d2
for VSWR !2
for 26 V (FM)/28 V (AM) to 19 V DC
Data rate
max. 32 kbit/s, higher data rates on
request
16 kbit/s baseband or diphase
m = 0.9; 'F = Âą6.25 kHz
Distortion AM/FM
(with 0 dBm input (300 Hz to 3500 Hz)) d8%
d1 dB
graceful degradation
graceful degradation from nominal
power
ALC (automatic level control) function
selectable
Modulation depth variation for
Âą15 dB, with input level setting
â15 dBm to 0 dBm
m = 0.8 to 0.98
Permissible mismatch without
damage
short circuit to open circuit, all phases
Noise modulation (S+N/N) (m = 0.9,
1 kHz; fm = 5 kHz)
Duty cycle
continuous transmission
Thermal protection
integrated temperature-controlled fans
Special tones and PTT
Test tone
Unwanted emissions
Harmonics suppression
Nonharmonic spurious suppression
(for !100 kHz from carrier frequency)
Phase noise attenuation
at 'f = Âą25 kHz from carrier
at 'f = Âą1% from carrier
at 'f = !Âą10 MHz
t40 dB
1 kHz/m = 0.9; generator included as
standard; for local and remote tests
VHF (108 MHz to 173.975 MHz)
UHF (225 MHz to 399.975 MHz):
t80 dB for 2nd harmonics
t65 dB for 2nd harmonics
t80 dB for 3rd harmonics and higher
Sidetone
(in plain AM/FM (normal voice) mode,
level related to adjusted RX output)
sidetone derived from carrier (AM) or
power monitor (FM) and introduced
into normal AF output
0 dB to 10 dB adjustable
t80 dBc, 90 dBc typ.
PTT signalling
t120 dBc (1 Hz) (VHF)/
t110 dBc (1 Hz) (UHF)
t150 dBc (1 Hz)
165 dBc (1 Hz)
variety of methods (configurable):
parallel (ground or voltage), serial or
via audio inband tone (e.g. 2040 Hz) on
request
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SR
Built-in interfaces
Serial interfaces
LAN
RF power amplifier (PA) and RF filter
control interfaces
2 serial interfaces up to 115 kbit/s; one
RS-232-C, the other one can be configured as RS-232-C/RS-422/RS-485,
parameters adjustable for radio control, configuration, user data (SECOS
mode with DPP)
2 interfaces acc. to Ethernet IEEE802.3,
RJ-45 connectors, 10baseT;
for radio control, configuration and
software download
Permissible altitude
Permanent operation
5 min operation
Transport
5000 m asl
10000 m asl
10000 m asl
Vibration
5 Hz to 55 Hz, 0.4 mm double
amplitude, test period: 30 min to DIN
EN 60068-2-6, MIL-STD-167-1 type 1,
STANAG4138
Shock
45 Hz to 2000 Hz, d40 g, 3 shocks in two
of three axes to DIN EN 60068-2-27,
MIL-STD-810D method 516.3
EMI/EMC
EN301489
MIL-STD-461E: CE101, CE102, CE106,
CS101, CS114, RE102, RS101 (maximally achieved test field strength
160 dBpT), RS-103 (2 MHz to 1 GHz,
test field strength 10 V/m)
2 user-configurable interfaces for
Rohde&Schwarz PA and filters: 2 x PA
or 2 x filter or 1 x filter + 1 x PA; others
on request
RF connectors for antennas
N female for TX or common TX/RX
antenna and BNC female for RX
Transients and spikes (AC supply)
AF standard interfaces
2 narrowband, 2 wideband;
for voice and user data
STANAG1008 edition 8 and
MIL-STD-1399 sec.103 type 1
Electrical safety
for special applications; input/output
(BNC connector): 0.8/1/2/5 or 10 MHz
configurable, can be daisy-chained
Directive 72/23/EEC (CE mark), IEC950,
VDE0804, VDE0805, VDE0866,
EN60950
Cooling
sensor-controlled forced-air cooling by
integrated fans, air flow direction from
front to rear side; if there is a front
door, it should have sufficient air inlets
External reference frequency
Timing system
Key distribution device interface
(fill gun)
input/output to receive/transmit TOD
(time of day) from/to external timing
system (e.g. R&S GT400) acc. to
STANAG 4246, STANAG 4430,
ICD-GPS-060
KYK-13, KOI-18, DTD (data transfer
device) conforming to DS100/DS101/
DS102; Rohde&Schwarz KDD (key
distribution device); external maintenance tool
External crypto devices
KY 58, KY 57 (others on request)
Miscellaneous interfaces
e.g. PTT, carrier SQ, NOGO, INHIBIT,
switched DC for external devices; other
I/Os on request
Power supply
DC operation
28 V nominal, 19 V to 31 V with some
degradations (acc. to Directives
89/336/EEC and 72/23/EEC)
AC operation
Receiver
Transmitter, transceiver
AC/DC operation
Power consumption
(example: VHF/UHF transceiver with
CCP, EPM, guard RX)
90 V to 264 V, 47 Hz to 63 Hz
90 V to 264 V, 47 Hz to 63 Hz;
110 V at 400 Hz to 440 Hz (with external
R&S IN4000A)
automatic switchover; priority to AC
depending on configuration and
DC/AC supply
approx. 80 W (receive mode, DC)
approx. 380 W/505 VA for VHF/UHF
30 W AM/100 W FM (transmit mode,
AC/DC)
Headphones output
max. 1 V at 150 : (adjustable to lower
values down to 0 V), NF7-type headset
connector
Integrated loudspeaker
max. 0.4 W, volume adjustable via knob
Dimensions
Microphone inputs
dynamic micro: 0 mV to 25 mV into
150 :
amplifier micro: 0 V to 1 V/150 :,
15 mA to 20 mA, 9 V DC max.,
NF7-type headset connector
Transceiver/transmitter (DC)
19" plug-in, 3 HU
Transceiver/transmitter set (AC/DC)
19" plug-in, 3 HU + 1 HU
(AC power supply)
Receiver/multiple receiver (AC/DC)
19" plug-in, 3 HU
Additional space for rear cabling
200 mm recommended
General data
Operating temperature range
â20qC to +55qC
Storage temperature range
â40qC to +70qC
Humidity
Dust and water protection
Control unit
Radio
Fungus
d95% at +55qC to MIL-STD-810F
method 507.2 and DIN EN 60068-2-30,
+25qC /+55qC
IP 54
IP 20, upgradeable to IP 32, for radio
front only
protected to MIL-STD-810C method
508.2
Weight
Receiver
approx. 14 kg
Transceiver
approx. 16.5 kg
EPM transceiver incl. guard receiver
approx.17.5 kg
External Universal Power Supply
R&S IN4000A
5.7 kg
Logistics
MTTR on module level
15 min typ.
Important note: All adjustments, settings and configurations stated above can
be performed locally or remotely via software.
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SR
8
Plug-in option
Ordering information
Guard Receiver R&S ET4400G
Order designation
Type
Order No.
Basic radio
Guard (distress) frequencies
121.5 MHz and 243 MHz in parallel at
the same time
Input signal protection
d+21 dBm
R&S M3SR Basic Unit Hardware for split-site
receiver radios, without CCP, without software,
AC/DC
R&S MR4400E 6057.8496.02
Sensitivity (with AM (m = 0.3),
121.5/243 MHz)
ITU-T S+N/N = 10 dB
dâ101 dBm
R&S M3SR Basic Unit Hardware for split-site
transmitter radios; without CCP, without
software, DC
Image and spurious rejection
80 dB
Selectivity (IF bandwidth)
t30 kHz/6 dB, d75 kHz/60 dB
AM internal noise level
(with input signal â47 dBm,
fm = 1 kHz, m = 0.8)
R&S MR4400S 6057.8544.02
R&S M3SR Basic Unit Hardware for transceiver
radios, without CCP, without software, DC
R&S MR4400X 6057.8596.02
Options
(S+N)/N = 40 dB (modulated-tounmodulated), weighted to ITU-T
Frequency range VHF, 108 MHz to 174 MHz
R&S FR4400U
6057.8644.02
Frequency range UHF, 225 MHz to 400 MHz
R&S FR4400D
6057.8696.02
Frequency range VHF/UHF, 100 MHz to
512 MHz
R&S FR4400T
6057.8744.02
VHF/UHF Guard Receiver, optional module for
R&S M3SR, 121.5 MHz and 243 MHz1)
R&S ET4400G
6102.8508.02
Recommended extras
Certified Environmental System
Certified Quality System
ISO 14001 ISO 9001
REG. NO 1954
DQS REG. NO 1954
Optional Software for fixed frequency and
Link 11 operation for R&S M3SR1)
R&S DS4400A 6102.2000.13
R&S M3SR Antenna Interface for separate
receive and transmit antennas1)
R&S GI4403
6103.4758.02
R&S M3SR Antenna Interface for separate
guard RX and combined RX/TX antennas1)
R&S GI4403
6103.4758.03
R&S M3SR Antenna Interface for separate
guard RX, main RX and TX antennas1)
R&S GI4403
6103.4758.04
Local Comfort Control Panel (CCP)
R&S GB4000C 6105.6006.02
Protection Processor Module for EPM
operation
R&S GP4400
6102.9504.03
Frequency Agile Filter Module for R&S M3SR
R&S FD4430
6103.2003.02
SECOS Waveform Software for voice operation R&S GS4400
6057.8796.02
SECOS DPP Waveform Software for voice
operation (voice + data)
6057.8796.03
R&S GS4400
SECOS Waveform Software for voice operation
(voice + data + TDMA)
R&S GS4400
on request
HAVE QUICK I Waveform Software for voice
operation
R&S GS4400
on request
HAVE QUICK II Waveform Software for voice
operation
R&S GS4400
6057.8796.05
SATURN Waveform Software for voice
operation
R&S GS4400
6057.8796.06
Interface Card for UHF DAMA operation with
external modem
R&S GI4402
on request
Packages for later upgrade to SECOS, HAVE QUICK I/II, SATURN, etc, on
request.
Digital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SR
R&S IN4000A
Power supply cable
R&S M3SR-R&S IN4000A, 1 m
6105.5500.03
6105.5639.10
Compatible remote control units
Comfort Control Unit (DC)
Comfort Control Unit (AC/DC)
(suitable for all radio types, incl. software)
Remote Control Units of R&S Series400U
Ordering example:
R&S GB406xx
on request
Handset, rugged type
R&S GA013
0693.7712.02
Headset, standard type
R&S GA015
0583.6012.02
Type
Order No.
Add item
Headset, light type
R&S GA015L
6082.9663.02
Basic radio
Headset, rugged type
R&S GA012
0693.7664.02
...
Microphone, dynamic, handheld type
R&S GA016H1 0583.5568.02
R&S MR 4400X 6057.8596.02
External filters and amplifiers
â
All Rohde&Schwarz filters and amplifiers in the radio frequency range are
suitable. They can be remote-controlled via the basic radio.
Options
...
Frequency range VHF/UHF, 100 MHz to
512 MHz
R&S FR 4400T
6057.8744.02
Mating connectors (suitable for all radio types)
â
Recommended extras
...
Optional Software for fixed frequency and
Link 11 operation for R&S M3SR
R&S DS 4400A 6102.2000.13
R&S GP 4400
6102.9504.03
â
...
HAVE QUICK II Waveform Software for voice
operation
R&S GS 4400
6057.8796.05
R&S ZF4410
6105.9011.02
Connector Set without circular connector
R&S ZF4410
6105.9011.03
VHF (100 MHz to 163 MHz)
R&S HK012
0459.7611.02
UHF (225 MHz to 400 MHz)
R&S HK001
0425.2781.03
VHF/UHF (100 MHz to 1300 MHz)
R&S HK014
0644.1514.02
VHF/UHF Diplexer (100 MHz to 163 MHz/
225 MHz to 400 MHz )
R&S FT224
0525.5117.03
Rohde&Schwarz Timing System3)
R&S GT400
on request
Antennas
â
...
Protection Processor Module for EPM
operation
Full Connector Set
Miscellaneous
â
...
For the correct order number
and type of your equipment,
please contact your Rohde & Schwarz
representative.
1)
2)
Correct order number:
6102.0607.13
for product
R&S XT 4460J
3)
Also available as upgrade kit.
With R&S GB406xx, only the operational remote-control functions of R&S M3SR are available.
Please ask for special firmware to control R&S M3SR.
Recommended for time synchronization of frequency hopping systems, including GPS receiver
and disciplined rubidium oscillator.
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG ÂMĂźhldorfstraĂe 15 81671 MĂźnchen  Germany
P.O.B. 8014 69  81614 Mßnchen, Germany  Telephone +49 89 4129-0  Fax +49 89 4129-13663 www.rohde-schwarz.com
PD 0757.6691.22ÂDigital Reprogrammable Software Radios R&S M3SRÂ Trade names are trademarks of the ownersÂSubject to changeÂData without tolerances: typical values
The following components need to be selected:
R&S M3SR Basic Unit for transceiver radios,
without CCP, without software, DC
R&S GB4000C on request
Audio accessories
The customer wishes to purchase an R&S M3SR that includes:
â transceiver
â for the VHF/UHF range (100 MHz to 512 MHz)
â with Link 11 function and HAVE QUICK II.
Order designation
2)
R&S GB4000C 6105.6006.03
Printed in Germany
Power supply
Universal Power Supply (external AC)
0203 (Bi sk)
Auxiliary equipment
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
$
95HPRWH&RQWURO 683URWRFRO
$
*HQHUDO
Via interface X24 (RS 485 / RS 232) the M3SR Transceiver can be remote-controlled by means
of a personal computer and/or for example the following control units:
GB 406C1 (only fixed frequency and voice)
GB 406C2 (only fixed frequency and voice)
$
)UDPHIRU'DWD7UDIILF
Each data transmission is started with "Line Feed" (lf) and ended with "Carriage Return" (cr).
Several commands up to a total length of 100 characters may be stringed together. Any characters exceeding this will be ignored. The response of the interface always starts with a line
feed.
$
$GGUHVV
Each data transmission contains an address.
Address format for commands: Axx
Address format for responses: axx
$
$FNQRZOHGJHPHQW
The acknowledgement contains, in addition to the frame with "lf" and "cr", the address and a
character signalling the following information:
= reception of a corrupted character (e.g. wrong parity, length or similar)
= command not permitted, false parameter etc.
= local operation (all inquiries / commands are responded to with "axxE" only)
= command correctly understood
The priority is governed by this sequence.
6076.0822.12.02
â A2.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
$
$GGUHVVLQJ
$
$GGUHVVLQJ5DQJH
Addresses 01 to 99 are the generally used device addresses.
The following is valid if Tx operation is separated from Rx operation (Split Site):
Rx addressing range: 01 to 49
Tx addressing range: 50 to 99
Tx address = (associated Rx) + 50
$
&KDUDFWHULVWLFVRI'DWD7UDQVPLVVLRQ
Transmission is carried out asynchronously in ISO-7-bit code and with odd parity (with
300 Baud even parity). Characters with wrong parity and faulty ones will be ignored.
Baud rates between 300 and 115 200 baud are accepted.
â A2.2 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
$
,QTXLU\
$
)RUPDWRI5HVSRQVHV
This format corresponds to that of the acknowledgements. Thus the same characters are contained (E, U) in addition to the frame, the address and the information required. The waiting
period until the end of response depends on the kind of command and varies from approximately 100 ms up to 5 s.
$
,QTXLU\RI&DUULHUDQG6TXHOFK
The control code for this inquiry is "N". This inquiry is recommended for general polling of
changes concerning the test message and the setting.
$
,QTXLU\RI)UHTXHQF\RU&KDQQHO1XPEHU
The control code for this inquiry is "O2". Either the channel number or the frequency can be
inquired, but not the channel / frequency assignment. This inquiry is recommended in order to
trace the scanning.
$
,QTXLU\RI(QWLUH6HWWLQJ
The control code for this inquiry is "O3". The following information is reported:
Radio characteristics
Frequency or channel
Mode of operation
Communication mode
Class of emission
Guard receiver on / off
Power stage
Squelch on / off
Scanning mode (only if set)
This inquiry should be performed about 1 s after all setting commands in order to check if the
command was executed successfully.
6076.0822.12.02
â A2.3 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
$
6FDQQLQJ 68RQO\
The control code is "Q" with two 2-digit channel numbers defining start and end channels.
The scanning mode is left by entering a new frequency or channel number.
If in scanning a channel (= preset stored in radio) is hit where reception is taking place, scanning will stop until a new scanning command is received.
$
7HVW0HVVDJHV
The control code for the inquiry of test messages is "O1". If there are several test messages,
all of them are contained in the radio answer.
$
&RQQHFWLYHV
The messages "VSWR > 2" (T4) and "No carrier" (T5) are linked with PTT and stored.
$
&KDQJH5HSRUW
Any alterations of test messages or status messages (S400U only) will be transmitted immediately after the next inquiry.
â A2.4 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
$
5HPRWHFRQWURO&RGHV
Command
Function
Code
Direction
B0
B7
CU â radio
C0xx
CU â radio
S400U only
C6xxFxxxxxx[x]
CU â radio
S400U only
Voice
Data
B0: wideband analog
Link 11
Link 4a
B0: wideband digital baseband
B0: wideband digital diphase
D0
D1
D1
D4
D5
D6
D7
CU â radio
Local mode Operation via local CU
(E instead of U at the end of message)
All commands and inquiries are answered with
"axxE" only.
radio â CU
EPM modes Plain (not encrypted)
Cipher ext. (encrypted)
Presets
Preset (stored in remote CU)
xx = 00 to 99
e.g. no. 05: C005F305000L1
Channel
loading
Loading of frequencies into channel
xx = 00 to 99 (= preset stored in radio)
Operation
S400U only
S4400 only
t.b.r.l.
S4400 only
Frequency
see A2.11
VHF + UHF
100.000 to 511.975 MHz
(25-kHz spacing)
100.000.0 to 511.991.6 MHz
(8.33-kHz spacing)
Fxxxxxx[x]
CU â radio
S4400 only
VHF
100.000 to 162.975 MHz
(25-kHz spacing)
100.000.0 to 162.991.6 MHz
(8.33-kHz spacing)
S400U only
UHF
225.000 to 399.975 MHz
(25-kHz spacing)
225.000.0 to 399.991.6 MHz
(8.33-kHz spacing)
S400U only
Guard
receiver
Off
On
G0
G1
CU â radio
Class of
emission
AM
FM
I1
I7
CU â radio
Channel
Select channel (= preset stored in radio)
xx = 00 to 99
Kxx
CU â radio
Manual
e.g. FxxxxxxL0
Preset
e.g. C0xxFxxxxxxL1 (= preset stored in CU)
e.g. KxxL1 (= preset stored in radio)
e.g. QxxxxL1
Guard (includes voice "B0D0" with AM "I1")
e.g. F243000L2 (UHF guard frequency)
Maritime (e.g. KxxL3)
L0
CU â radio
Frequency
modes
Note
6076.0822.12.02
L1
S400U only
S400U only
L2
L3
n/a
â A2.5 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
Command
Inquiry
Inquiries
Function
Carrier and squelch reports
recommended time-out for inquiry "N" 1.2 s,
for all other inquiries and commands 5 s
(9 600 Bd)
Version and date of radio software
(response Vx.xxdd.mm.yy)
Test message
(response T0 to Txx)
Channel or frequency
(response Kxx or Fxxxxx)
Entire setting parameters
(response Pxyz[Cxxx*][Fxxxxxx][Kxx]Lx
[Qxxyy*]BxDxGxIxSxVx[Wx**]
Status of HDX setup
[ ] = available according to selected mode
* = S400U only
** = valid in anti-jam mode only
Radio types Frequency range
x=1: VHF
X=2: UHF
X=3: VHF/UHF
X=5 to 7
Equipment type
y=1 to 4
y=5: Rx
y=6: Tx
y=7: Rx/Tx
y=8: split site
Scanning
Radio
modes
Test
messages
(CBIT)
â A2.6 â
Code
Direction
CU â radio
O0
CU â radio
Note
S400U only
O1
O2
O3
O5
Pxyz
S400U only
radio â CU
S400U only
S400U only
Qxxyy
CU â radio
S400U only
Radio off
Radio on (low power)
Radio on (medium power)
Radio on (high power)
S0
S1
S3
S5
CU â radio
S4400: S0 is
effective for Tx
only
Radio Go
Radio NoGo in local operation
Highamp NoGo
Amp NoGo
VSWR > 2
Carrier NoGo
Blower on
Supply voltage out of range
Local CU NoGo
Tx/Rx switch NoGo
PP NoGo
DC NoGo
AC NoGo
IF NoGo
Synth NoGo
Option 2 NoGo
GRx NoGo
Link 11 / 4A NoGo
Option 1 NoGo
RF NoGo
Overtemperature
Audio IF NoGo
FPGA NoGo
Battery low
DAMA NoGo
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T40
T41
T42
T43
T44
T45
T46
T47
T48
T49
T50
T51
T52
T53
radio â CU
Scanning between channels xx and yy
xx = 00 to 98
yy = 01 to 99
Switched off by frequency (FxxxxxxL0) or
channel (KxxL1) command
S400U only
S400U only
S400U only
S400U only
S4400 only
S4400 only
S4400 only
t.b.r.l.
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
Command
Function
Code
Radio warning messages
Same problem as Ty/Tyy, but meaning is only
"Warning" instead of "NoGo".
T1yy
Response if command is free from syntax errors (= "*" instead of "U") or
bit errors (e.g. parity = "?" instead of "U")
"!" instead of "U"
AF control
Squelch off
Squelch on
V0
V1
CU â radio
IF bandwidth
Narrowband
Wideband
W0
W1
CU â radio
Carrier /
squelch
reports
No carrier and no squelch
Squelch - Rx
Squelch - GRx
Squelch - Rx and GRx
Carrier
Carrier and squelch - Rx
Carrier and squelch - GRx
Carrier and squelch - Rx and GRx
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
radio â CU
PTT off
PTT (timeout 1 s)
PTT with tone (timeout 1 s)
PTT enabled
PTT inhibited
Tone without PTT
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
CU â radio
f = hex number from 0 to f
Zff
CU â radio
Positive
acknowledgement
PTT
control
Userbits
output
6076.0822.12.02
Direction
Note
radio â CU
S400U only
S400U only
S400U only
S400U only
S400U only
S400U only
S400U only
t.b.r.l.
â A2.7 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
$
([DPSOHV
(e.g. address 01)
Command
Code â
Code â
Meaning
Inquiry
lfA01Ncr
lfa01X0Ucr
SQL / carrier off
Inquiry
lfA01O1cr
lfa01T0Ucr
No failure
Inquiry
lfA01O2cr
lfa01F300000Ucr
Current frequency
Inquiry
lfA01O3cr
lfa01P371F300000L0B0D0G0I1S1V1W0Ucr
Overall status
Transmitter
on
lfA01S1O1cr
lfa01T0Ucr
No failure
(low power)
Frequency
lfA01F300000L0O3cr
lfa01Ecr
Local operation
Frequency
lfA01F30000L0cr
lfa01*cr
Impermissible value
(30 MHz)
Frequency
(8.33-kHz
spacing)
lfA01F1234500L0cr
(e.g. 123.4500 MHz)
lfa01Ucr
7 numbers instead of 6:
8.33-kHz spacing or 25 /
12.5-kHz spacing with offset
Channel 00
lfA01K00L1cr
lfa01Ucr
Correctly understood
Guard
receiver on
lfA01G1O3cr
lfa01P371F300000L0B0D0G0I1S1V1W0Ucr
GRx not installed
(answer: G0 !)
Scanning
lfA01Q0108L1O3Ncr
lfa01P371K01L1Q0108B0D0G0I1S1V1W0X0Ucr
Correctly understood
(S400U only)
Inquiry during scanning
lfA01O2cr
lfA01O2cr
lfa01K02Ucr
lfa01K03Ucr
Scanning operation
(S400U only)
lfA01O2cr
lfa01K07X1Ucr
Scanning stop at channel 7
due to reception
(recommended inquiry rate
1/s)
Transmitter
off
lfA01S0O3cr
lfa01P372F300000L0B0D0G0I1S0V1W0Ucr
Correctly understood
Inquiry of
alteration
lfA01Ncr
lfa01X1cr
SQL main receiver
(recommended inquiry rate
1/s)
Inquiry of
alteration
lfA01Ncr
lfa01X0T07Ucr
Occurence of NoGo message:
Operating voltage out of
range
(radio attaches message
Txx altough not inquired)
â A2.8 â
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
$
5XOHVIRU5HPRWH)UHTXHQF\&RQWURORI6HULHV065
$
,QSXWRI'LJLWV N+]6SDFLQJZLWKRXW2IIVHW
Format: FFFFXX (XX = 00 / 12 / 25 / 37 / 50 / 62 / 75 / 87)
$
,QSXWRI'LJLWV N+]6SDFLQJZLWK2IIVHWRU
N+]6SDFLQJ
a) Offset
Format: FFFFXXO (XX = 00 / 12 / 25 / 37 / 50 / 62 / 75 / 87)
O = 1: -2.5 kHz
O = 2: +2.5 kHz
O = 4: -5 kHz
O = 5: +5 kHz
O = 7: -7.5 kHz
O = 8: +7.5 kHz
b) 8.33-kHz spacing
Format: FFFFXXX (XXX = 000 / 083 / 166 / 250 / 333 / 416 / 500 / 583 / 666 /
750 / 833 / 916)
6076.0822.12.02
â A2.9 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
$
)UHTXHQF\7DEOH
(e.g. 118.000 MHz to 118.100 MHz)
â A2.10 â
Frequency
(MHz)
Spacing / BW /
Offset (kHz)
Command
118.000.0
8.33 / NB / 12.5 / WB / 0
12.5 / WB / +2.5
12.5 / WB / +5.0
12.5 / WB / +7.5
1180000
118000
1180002
1180005
1180008
118.000.3
8.33 / NB / -
11800083
118.012.5
12.5 / WB / 0
12.5 / WB / -2.5
12.5 / WB / +2.5
12.5 / WB / -5.0
12.5 / WB / +5.0
12.5 / WB / -7.5
12.5 / WB / +7.5
118012
1180121
1180122
1180124
1180125
1180127
1180128
118.016.6
8.33 / NB / -
1180166
118.025.0
8.33 / NB / 12.5 / WB / 0
12.5 / WB / -2.5
12.5 / WB / +2.5
12.5 / WB / -5.0
12.5 / WB / +5.0
12.5 / WB / -7.5
12.5 / WB / +7.5
1180250
118025
1180251
1180252
1180254
1180255
1180257
1180258
118.033.3
8.33 / NB / -
1180333
118.037.5
12.5 / WB / 0
12.5 / WB / -2.5
12.5 / WB / +2.5
12.5 / WB / -5.0
12.5 / WB / +5.0
12.5 / WB / -7.5
12.5 / WB / +7.5
118037
1180371
1180372
1180374
1180375
1180377
1180378
118.041.6
8.33 / NB / -
1180416
118.050.0
8.33 / NB / 12.5 / WB / 0
12.5 / WB / -2.5
12.5 / WB / +2.5
12.5 / WB / -5.0
12.5 / WB / +5.0
12.5 / WB / -7.5
12.5 / WB / +7.5
1180500
118050
1180501
1180502
1180504
1180505
1180507
1180508
118.058.3
8.33 / NB / -
1180583
118.062.5
2.5 / WB / 0
12.5 / WB / -2.5
12.5 / WB / +2.5
12.5 / WB / -5.0
12.5 / WB / +5.0
12.5 / WB / -7.5
12.5 / WB / +7.5
118062
1180621
1180622
1180624
1180625
1180627
1180628
118.066.6
8.33 / NB / -
1180666
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
6076.0822.12.02
Frequency
(MHz)
Spacing / BW /
Offset (kHz)
Command
118.075.0
8.33 / NB / 12.5 / WB / 0
12.5 / WB / -2.5
12.5 / WB / +2.5
12.5 / WB / -5.0
12.5 / WB / +5.0
12.5 / WB / -7.5
12.5 / WB / +7.5
1180750
118075
1180751
1180752
1180754
1180755
1180757
1180758
118.083.3
8.33 / NB / -
1180833
118.087.5
12.5 / WB / 0
12.5 / WB / -2.5
12.5 / WB / +2.5
12.5 / WB / -5.0
12.5 / WB / +5.0
12.5 / WB / -7.5
12.5 / WB / +7.5
118087
1180871
1180872
1180874
1180875
1180877
1180878
118.091.6
8.33 / NB / -
1180916
118.100.0
12.5 / WB / 0
12.5 / WB / -2.5
12.5 / WB / -5.0
12.5 / WB / -7.5
118100
1181001
1181004
1181007
â A2.11 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠V.24 Remote Control (S400U Protocol)
$
,&$2)UHTXHQF\7DEOH
(e.g. 118.000 MHz to 118.100 MHz)
â A2.12 â
ICAO Frequency
(MHz)
Spacing (kHz)
Command
118.000
25
118000
118.005
8.33
1180000
118.010
8.33
1180083
118.015
8.33
1180166
118.025
25
118025
118.030
8.33
1180250
118.035
8.33
1180333
118.040
8.33
1180416
118.050
25
118050
118.055
8.33
1180500
118.060
8.33
1180583
118.065
8.33
1180666
118.075
25
118075
118.080
8.33
1180750
118.085
8.33
1180833
118.090
8.33
1180916
118.100
25
118100
6076.0822.12.02
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠LAN / V.24 Remote Control (GB2PP Protocol)
$
/$195HPRWH&RQWURO *%333URWRFRO
$
*HQHUDO
More detailed information is provided by the Serial Interface Control Document, available on
demand from Rohde & Schwarz at extra charge (order no.: 6102.3258.00).
$
/LVWRI&RPPDQGV
The following lists contains possible commands. It does not claim to be complete.
$
AL
AS
DL
DM
ER
EX
FF
GR
GX
HQ
HW
MH
OP
PP
RA
RB
RC
SC
SE
SH
ST
SV
UA
3ULPDU\&RPPDQGV
ALE
ALIS
Download
DAMA
Errors
External interfaces
Fixed frequency
General radio functionality
Guard receiver
Have Quick
Hardware interface
MIB handling
Options
Preset Page control
Selection between two radios (with M3SR the radio selection parameter in the
MIB path is left out, default = RA)
With M3TR for multi-combined radios
Radio control
Session control
SECOS
SECOM-H
SATURN
SECOM-V
User access
6076.0822.12.01
â A3.1 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠LAN / V.24 Remote Control (GB2PP Protocol)
$
AC
AD
AF
AG
AM
AP
AS
AS
AT
CC
CD
CL
CL
CO
CP
CP
CS
CS
DM
DM
DM
DO
DP
DP
DS
DS
ED
EE
EL
EP
ET
FD
GN
GR
ID
IL
IR
IS
IT
LD
LI
LP
LS
â A3.2 â
6HFRQGDU\&RPPDQGV
Set and request the current communication mode of the radio
Define and request the current address definition list of the radio
Set and request the configuration parameters of the AFI
Set and request the current AF AGC status
Set and request the audio mapping between audio and Comline
Set and request the active control port
Set and request the order of audio output at the radio front panel
Start / stop scan mode
Set all trap-commands to off
Request the current capabilities of the Comlines
Request the detail of one entry in the CBIT list
Clear the complete error list of the radio
Set and request the clipper status for the receiver module
Set and request the current communication mode
Change stored PIN number
Set and request the current parameter page
Request the status of the last CBIT
Request and trap the current cipher unit status
Request the current data port mode status
Set and request the device mapping between an external device and the radio
Set and request the default communication mode of the radio
Delete an activated radio option
Disable activated user PIN
Delete one or a range of Preset Pages
Set all radio settings to default values
Set and request the default Tx power switch
Request the error detail for an error log entry
Request the data of one error log entry
Request the error list with all error log entries
Enable special PIN for a user
Request the current radio elapsed time
Set and request the mapping for full duplex mode
Request the current GO/NOGO status of the radio
Set and request the current guard receiver status
Request the detail of one entry in the IBIT list
Request the inventory list of the radio
Enable / disable Rx
Request the status of the last IBIT
Enable / disable Tx
Set and request the logical address of a local control unit
Set and request the LAN interface parameters
Set and request the parameters of one preset page within the loaded preset
Request a status list of the preset pages stored in the loaded preset
6076.0822.12.01
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠LAN / V.24 Remote Control (GB2PP Protocol)
MA
MC
MD
ML
MP
MT
ND
OA
OL
OP
PA
PD
PD
PF
PG
PL
PM
PP
PS
PT
RI
RL
RP
RS
RS
RS
RX
SB
SC
SD
SD
SI
SI
SI
SM
SN
SP
SP
SP
SQ
SQ
SS
ST
Acknowledge / disacknowledge and request marker tone
Set and request the mapping between slot numbers and Comline for a module
Set and request the current modulation status
Request the available communication modes
Set and request the default MIB path
Enable or disable marker tone for the radio Comline
Request the detail of one entry in the inventory list
Set and request the own address of the radio
Request the radio option list
Activate a new radio option
Set and request the configuration parameters of the VU PA
Send new data to the radio within the Preset key download container
Set and request the current Preset definition
Set and request the current PTT status
Set and request the activated connection control
Set and request the configuration parameters of the radio platform
Set and request the PTT mapping between keylines and Comlines
Set and request the currently selected Preset Page
Set and request the currently selected Preset
Set and request the current PTT tone status
Request the current Rx indicator status
Set and request the radio local status
Restore the selected Preset Page from Loaded Preset to User Preset
Set and request the standby mode status of the radio modules
Request the current RSSI level
Request the current guard RSSI level
Set and request the configuration parameters of the VU RX
Request the current sessions of the connected radio
Request the current capabilities
Send new software to the radio within the software download container
Set and request the definition of the main / standby partners
Start / stop IBIT
Request the current squelch indicator status
Set and request the serial interface parameters
Set and request the current scan mode status
Request the current scan indicator status
Set and request the squelch polarity
Save the parameters of the current preset page
Set and request the channel spacing for fix frequency mode
Set and request the current squelch status
Set and request the squelch switch status
Set and request the assignment of a radioâs own Comline to a split-site partnerâs
Comline
Set and request a current session on a Comline
6076.0822.12.01
â A3.3 â
065 75$16&(,9(5 Â ; $ ; $
Operatorâs Manual ⢠LAN / V.24 Remote Control (GB2PP Protocol)
SY
TC
TI
TO
TO
TR
TS
TV
TX
â A3.4 â
Set and request the configuration parameters of the VU SYN
Request the current Tx indicator status
Set and request the radio time
Request the current Tx output power indicator status
Set and request the current Tx offset status
Set and request the current Tx / Rx frequency status
Set and request the Tx power switch status
Request the current Tx VSWR indicator status
Set and request the configuration parameters of the VU TX
6076.0822.12.01
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 290 XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6 About : uuid:3cbaf5b5-e8ee-407d-944d-9d42e6399614 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows) Create Date : 2008:10:06 14:28:45-04:00 Modify Date : 2008:10:06 14:28:45-04:00 Metadata Date : 2003:08:25 13:49:00Z Creator Tool : Windows NT 4.0 Document ID : uuid:dddc5d2c-617f-43c3-a8e9-865eab30a704 Format : application/pdf Title : Untitled Document Creator : Windows NT 4.0EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools